e _vߋt&‰ vƇR 5@Ƈ ><Ĉxއ r& BL~7 eb7Ć~~FEFCzFSvh ***THIS VOLUME DOES NOT CONTAIN A HARDWARE BOOTABLE SYSTEM ***  w l  ť ť 0B p Aaw : ' UD$BA L &( U BQ Е*  & & @( f>HELPFILES 04JAN84142122HELPFILES[001,001] DECFILE11A ?.t:#z04JAN84142122C. xQz04JAN84142122GH#N. kz04JAN84142122V .NNz04JAN84142122F.*O:z04JAN84142122=.OPz04JAN84142122II.J* H303JAN8416170003JAN84161658K{L.M f 303JAN8416170303JAN84161701 M. P x303JAN8416170603JAN84161704 Y. G&s303JAN8416170903JAN84161707d. J:,8^303JAN8416171103JAN84161710fr. GFqO303JAN8416171403JAN84161713hi. Ot!303JAN8416171703JAN84161715n+A.GhK f9303JAN8416172003JAN84161718u_\.GK @j303JAN8416172303JAN84161721|s.N**f H303JAN8416172803JAN84161724)}ώ.I_303JAN8416173003JAN84161729'.G 303JAN8416173303JAN841617315.G*&}303JAN8416173603JAN84161734У.M&303JAN8416174003JAN84161737A.J (@303JAN8416174203JAN84161741 .Ge 303JAN8416174503JAN841617436.F0L303JAN8416174803JAN84161746{.Gy303JAN8416175103JAN84161749ԯ.Fy303JAN8416175403JAN84161752.KNX303JAN8416175603JAN84161755:.HPe"303JAN8416175903JAN84161758^Z.F>303JAN8416180203JAN84161800e.I@j303JAN8416180403JAN84161803q.H z303JAN8416180803JAN84161806 A6.ID{303JAN8416181003JAN841618093. K}303JAN8416181303JAN84161812.!GH'303JAN8416181603JAN841618152;."JP2d303JAN8416181903JAN84161818 .#Kd4303JAN8416182203JAN84161820f\.$O$$(y:}303JAN8416182603JAN84161823#.%N &:}303JAN8416182903JAN84161828 4.&O:jL303JAN8416183403JAN84161831>q.'I**vLD303JAN8416184103JAN84161835)T.(M_Ma303JAN8416184403JAN84161842~.)HRv303JAN8416184703JAN84161846,.*OSZ303JAN8416185203JAN84161849.+O fZ303JAN8416185603JAN841618531.,HfZg,303JAN8416185903JAN84161857.-ITq303JAN8416190203JAN84161901..JUq5a303JAN8416190603JAN84161904./LVqM303JAN8416190903JAN84161907.0HYq303JAN8416191303JAN84161911܀.1O Hs303JAN8416191603JAN84161914 .2Nw@j303JAN8416192003JAN84161918 ].3Gxs303JAN8416192403JAN84161922d.4O<<x303JAN8416193003JAN84161925; X.5M ys303JAN8416193403JAN84161932 n .6Nnyd303JAN8416193803JAN84161935.7P P zR303JAN8416194203JAN84161939 !F.8E6@303JAN8416194503JAN84161943+.9Lv<303JAN8416194903JAN84161947.o.:Hv|C^303JAN8416195203JAN84161950/d.;v2d303JAN8416200403JAN841619533cO.<FQ303JAN8416200803JAN84162006F.=BXT`:303JAN8416201203JAN84162009.>ODDw303JAN8416202003JAN84162013Ct:#z xQz kzNNz*O:zOPz p H3 3 3 s3 ,8^3 qO3 t!3K f93K @j3 H3_33&}3&3(@3e 3L3y3y3X3e"3>3@j3z3{3 }3!'3"2d3#d43$y:}3%:}3&jL3'vLD3(_Ma3)Rv3*SZ3+fZ3,Zg,3-Tq3.Uq5a3/VqM30Yq31s32w@j33xs34x35ys36yd37 zR38@39v<3:|C^3;2d3<Q3=T`:3>w3F@BACKUP invokes the Micro/RSX system backup procedure. This procedureCis a series of commands that perform backup, restore, and duplicateEFoperations without you typing the commands yourself. These operations>allow you to store an additional copy of your files on tape or7diskette to use if your original files become damaged. TBSee Chapter 3 of the Micro/RSX System Manager's Guide for documen-Ctation of the system backup procedure. Note that Chapter 9 of thisAJmanual documents the DCL BACKUP command, which is part of this procedure. kup procedure. This procedureCis a series of commands that perform backup, restore, and duplicateEFoperations without you typing the commands yourself. These operations>allow you to store an additional copy of your files on tape or7diskette to use if your original files become damaged. TBSee Chapter 3 of the Micro/RSX System Manager's Guide for documen-Ctation of the system backup procedure. Note that Chapter 9 of thisAJmanual documents the DCL BACKUP coD A user batch job is a text file that reproduces an entire terminalG session. Type HELP BATCH EXAMPLE for an example. For information on ( submitting batch jobs type HELP SUBMIT.C You can include most DCL commands in user batch jobs. The syntax mI is identical to interactive commands except that a dollar sign ($) must K precede each command in the user batch job. User batch jobs also include tF commands that are recognized by the batch processor only. The first F command in a user batch job must be $JOB and the last must be $EOJ. H For additional help type HELP BATCH command. Help is available on the $ following batch-specific commands: ? CONTINUE GOTO DATA IF EOD i: JOB EOJ ON STOP SET  cI Any batch command can optionally be preceded by a label and followed by u a comment, as in this example:l+ $[label:]batch-specific command [!comment]t 2 EXAMPLEe# Here is a skeleton user batch job.s $JOB FRED [303,5] $cli command[s] $@indirect  $DATA MYLIB $EODp $EOJEF In this example, the $JOB command logs the batch job in with the nameI FRED and UIC of [303,5]. The cli command line can be any number of DCL iL commands. Note that you can invoke indirect command files from your batch J job and supply data for the indirect file (or for DCL commands or tasks) H by using the $DATA and $EOD batch-specific commands. The $EOJ command  logs the batch job out.2 JOBs $JOBjA $JOB marks the beginnning of the batch job and must appear firstM in the file.$ E$ $JOB[/qualifier] [loglabel] [[uic]] g Command Qualifier  /TIME:m or /TIME:(hh:mm)i< The /TIME qualifier limits CPU time for the user batch job.- HEL and LOGIN cannot be used for batch jobs.a2 EOJb $EOJl a $EOJ ends the user batch job. L, BYE or LOGOUT cannot be used in batch jobs.2 ON $ON E $ON defines an exit status code and specifies the action to be takenjH by the batch processor when that code or a more severe code is returned" by subsequent commands and tasks. STOP $ON status-code THEN CONTINUE GOTO label status-code: WARNING ERRORi SEVEREERRORf- ON WARNING THEN STOP is the default setting.e@ The default setting is restored after an ON has been activated. See also HELP BATCH IF.2 IF $IF nE $IF checks for a given status code following execution of a previoussL command in the batch job. Unlike $ON, $IF responds only to the status-code you specify.e GOTO label t $IF status-code THEN CONTINUE STOP where status-code= WARNING ERROR SEVEREERROR See also HELP BATCH ON.2 GOTO $GOTO NE $GOTO directs the batch processor to skip directly to a line with a dI specified label and continue processing from there. The line may appearFH after or before the $GOTO. $GOTO can be used alone or with $ON or $IF. $GOTO label $ON status-code THEN GOTO label $IF status-code THEN GOTO label $label:[command] F A label can be any six alphanumeric characters. Any line containing 9 a batch-specific command can optionally include a label.H On the GOTO line, the label is NOT terminated with a colon (:). On theC line actually being labeled, the label is terminated with a colon.c 2 CONTINUE $CONTINUE G $CONTINUE is a no-operation. It can be used alone or with $ON or $IF.e $CONTINUE $ON status-code THEN CONTINUE $IF status-code THEN CONTINUEK See HELP CONTINUE for information on the interactive form of this command.h2 DATA $DATA nL $DATA marks the beginning of a data block to be included in the user batch F job. Data is any required user input other than DCL or any other CLIL commands. $DATA should immediately follow any command that requests input. $DATA[/qualifier[s]]  Command Qualifierse /NOCOPY /DOLLARS[:"string"]G You do not need to specify $DATA unless you need to specify any of its-F qualifiers. Any line without the dollar-sign ($) is treated as data. For example,c> $@COMFILE1 ! This indirect command file prompts for a library MYLIB1k . . .> $@COMFILE2 ! This indirect command file prompts for a library $DATA MYLIB2h $EOD2 The two data blocks are treated exactly the same.3 NOCOPY $DATA/NOCOPY$> /NOCOPY specifies that the data block not be included in the  batch log file. 3 DOLLARSe $DATA/DOLLARS[:"string"]uF /DOLLARS permits lines beginning with a dollar sign ($) to be treatedI as data. Without this qualifier, the first line beginning with $ closes  the data block.I If you use /DOLLARS, you must explicitly close the data block with $EOD.mH If you specify a string argument to /DOLLARS, you must use that stringJ to close the data block. This enables you to pass data, such as another . batch job , that includes the string "$EOD". For example,g? $@COMFILE ! This indirect command file asks for salary figuresm $DATA/DOLLARS $352.40 $134.20 $1235.50e $EODd a2 EOD  $EODt $ $EOD marks the end of a data block. eM $EOD must be used if you have opened the data block with either DATA/DOLLARSa or DATA/DOLLARS:"$EOD". See also HELP BATCH DATA.2 SET $SET [NO] ONaK $SET NO ON disables the current setting of ON, including the default. Thet% space between NO and ON is optional.rL $SET ON reinstates the ON setting to whatever it was before the $SET NO ON.M $SET with other parameters or qualifiers is a CLI command, and has the same ; effect in batch jobs as in interactive mode, for instance . $SET DEFAULTb2 STOP $STOP eC $STOP stops the batch job. It can be used alone or with ON or IF. $STOP $ON status-code THEN STOP $IF status-code THEN STOP O= See also HELP STOP for the interactive form of this command.h% space between NO and ON is optional.rL $SET ON reinstates the ON setting to whatever it was before the $SET NO ON.M $SET with other parameters orF You can receive help by typing either HELP or ? after the DCL prompt,F $ , followed by the desired topic. For example, for help on the COPYC command, type either HELP COPY or ? COPY. The examples in the HELPD files indicate only the first of these two formats in order to save space. E Note that you can type HELP requests in either upper or lower case. E Help is available for DCL commands, utilities, and system features. B For a list of DCL commands, type HELP DCL_COMMAND. For a list of0 utilities and system features, type HELP MORE.  aC If your Micro/RSX system includes other software, such as BASIC ore4 FORTRAN, help also is available on these features. 1 DCL_COMMANDeG Help is available for the following DCL commands. Note that HELP for tF some of these commands is available only with the Micro/RSX Advanced  Programmer's Kit.B ABORT ALLOCATE ANALYZE APPEND ASSIGN H BACKUP BROADCAST BYE CANCEL CONTINUEH CONVERT COPY CREATE DEALLOCATE DEASSIGNH DEBUG DELETE DIFFERENCES DIRECTORY DISMOUNTD EDIT FIX HELLO HELP HOLDE INITIALIZE INSTALL LIBRARY LINK LOGINeE LOGOUT MESSAGE MOUNT PRINT PURGE'C RELEASE REMOVE RENAME REQUEST RUNSP SET SHOW START STOP SUBMIT & TYPE UNFIX UNLOCKB For information on a command, type HELP commandname. Additional 9 help on a command qualifier is often available by typing D HELP commandname qualifier. For the short forms of some commands,  type HELP BRIEF. 1 MESSAGE_ERROR_LOGO @DCLMESS U1 MFT #DTE1 FILE_TRANSFER_UTILITY #DTE1 DATA_TERMINAL_EMULATIONE#DTE1 DTEE@DTE 1 FORTRAN @FORTRAN 1 DATATRIEVE#DTR1 DTR @DTR1 PASCAL@PASCALT1 DIBOL @DIBOL1 COBOL @DCLC81 1 BASIC@DCLBAS 1 DECTYPE @DECTYPE 1 RSX_OFIS#ROS1 OFIS#ROS1 ROS,@DCLROSP1 ABORTa @DCLABORTo 1 ALLOCATE @DCLALLOCd1 APPEND @DCLAPPEND 1 RESTOREt#BACKUPH 1 ARCHIVEn#BACKUPf1 BACKUP @DCLBACKUP 1 ANALYZE @DCLANALYZ1 ASSIGN @DCLASSIGN1 BYEG#LOGOUTO1 CANCEL @DCLCANCEL1 CON_ONLINE_ALL@CON 1 CONTINUE@DCLCONT1 COPY@DCLCOPY 1 CONVERT @DCLCONV1 CREATE#CFL1 CFL @DCLCREATE 1 DEASSIGN @DCLDEASS 1 DEALLOCATE @DCLDEALL 1 DEBUG @DCLDEBUGD1 DELETE @DCLDELETE 1 DIFFERENCES @DCLDIFF 1 DIRECTORY@DCLDIRF 1 DISMOUNT@DCLDISL1 EDT #EDIT1 EDIT@DCLEDIT1 FIXD@DCLFIX1 HELLO#LOGIN1 HELP@DCLHELP1 INDIRECT_COMMAND_PROCESSOR#ICP1 ICPL@ICP1 HOLD@DCLHOLD 1 INITIALIZE@DCLINIT 1 INSTALLG@DCLINST 1 LIBRARY@DCLLIBL1 TKB_#LINKA1 LINK@DCLLINK1 LOGINO@MCR1 LOGOUT @DCLLOGOUT1 MACROL @DCLMACROA 1 BROADCASTF@DCLBROR1 MOUNTE @DCLMOUNTL1 PRINT @DCLPRINT1 PURGE @DCLPURGE 1 RELEASE@DCLREL1 REMOVE @DCLREMOVE1 RENAME @DCLRENAME 1 REQUESTL@DCLREQI1 RUN@DCLRUN 1 PASSWORD#SET1 SETD@DCLSET 1 SUBMIT @DCLSUBMIT1 BRIEFN @DCLSHORTS1 SHOW@DCLSHOW1 SORT@DCLSORT1 MERGE @DCLMERGE1 STARTD @DCLSTARTN1 STOP@DCLSTOP1 TYPE@DCLTYPE1 UNFIXI @DCLUNFIXL1 UNLOAD@UNL1 UNLOCK @DCLUNLOCK1 MORED Help is available for the following utilities and system features. F Note that help for some of these topics comes only with the Micro/RSXH Advanced Programmer's Kit. Type HELP topic for additional information.E -------------------------------------------------------------------- 1 Command procedures: @OPTION @BACKUPDF --------------------------------------------------------------------- Foreign commands:E BOO BRK CLI CON_ONLINE_ALL LOA OPE UNLOADF ---------------------------------------------------------------------> RMS-11 (Record Management Services for the PDP-11) Utilities:B BCK CNV DES DSP IFL RST RMSF ---------------------------------------------------------------------8 Utilities: FLX DMP MFT VFYF --------------------------------------------------------------------- Other topics:E ASCII BATCH DTE EXECUTIVE FCS IOX O= INDIRECT MACRO MAG PMD SYSLIB - 1 @OPTION-@OPTION- 1 @BACKUPR@BACKUPa1 FCSS@FCS1 MAGTAPE_CONTROL_TASK@MAG1 FILE_DUMP_UTILITY #DMP1 DUMP#DMP1 DMP @DMP 1 EXECUTIVE @EXECUTIVE1 FILEX-#FLX1 FLEX#FLX1 FLX-@FLX1 IOX-@IOX1 POSTMORTEM_DUMP_TASK#PMD1 PMDP@PMD1 RECORD_MANAGEMENT_SERVICES#RMS1 RMS-@RMS1 BCK-#RMSBCK-1 RMSBCK@RMSBCK1 CNVt#RMSCNV1 RMSCNV@RMSCNVT1 DES #RMSDESE1 RMSDES@RMSDES 1 DSP #RMSDSP 1 RMSDSP@RMSDSP 1 IFLG#RMSIFL 1 RMSIFL@RMSIFL-1 RSTT#RMSRSTT1 RMSRST@RMSRSTB1 SYSLIB@SYSLIBS1 VERIFY#VFY1 VFYK@VFY1 ASCIID@ASCII1 BATCHP@BATCH1 BOOT@BOO1 XDT#BRK1 BRK@BRK1 COMMAND_LINE_INTERPRETER#CLI1 CLI-@CLI1 LOAD@LOA1 OPENREGISTER@OPE ABORT[/COMMAND] commandname' ABORT/TASK[/TERMINAL:ddnn:] [taskname]T qF The ABORT command aborts the execution of either a command or a task.F The /TASK qualifier aborts a task running at your terminal. The /TASKA qualifier must be typed in the format show above. If you do not G specify a task name, the task that you installed using the RUN commando is aborted by default. E The /TERMINAL qualifier aborts a task running on some terminal othera0 than your own. This is a privileged qualifier.  Command abbreviation: ABORT/TASK[/TERMINAL:ddnn:] [taskname]T qF The ABORT command aborts the execution of either a command or a task.F The /TASK qualifier aborts a task running at your terminal. The /TASKA qualifier must be typed in the format show above. If you do not G specify a task name, the task that you installed using the RUN commando is aborted by default. E The /TERMINAL qualifier aborts a task running on some terminal othera0 than your own. This is a privileged q. ALLOCATE[/qualifier[s]] dd[nn:] [logicalname] /TERMINAL:ddnn:  /TYPE:devicetype c eA The ALLOCATE command reserves a device for the exclusive use of / the issuing terminal.F If you specify the device as ddnn:, the device with the number nn is G reserved for you. If you specify only dd, the first available unit ofeF the types represented by this mnemonic is reserved for you: this is  called a generic allocation.TJ The logical name assigns a logical name to the device as you allocate it., The logical name must be in the form xxnn:.H The /TERMINAL:ddnn: qualifier allocates the device to another terminal. This is a privileged command.H The /TYPE:devicetype qualifier allocates a specific type of device from0 among the types represented by the mnemonic dd.pecify only dd, the first available unit ofeF the types represented by this mnemonic is reserved for you: this is  called a generic allocation.TJ The logical name assigns a logical name to thE The ANALYZE command allows you to collect information about hardwareF on your system. You can determine the number of bad blocks on a diskE volume with the ANALYZE/MEDIA command, create and format informationyG on system failures with the ANALYZE/CRASH_DUMP command, and get error CA logging information on system devices with the ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG command.. For more information on these commands, type: HELP ANALYZE MEDIAd HELP ANALYZE ERROR_LOG A HELP ANALYZE CRASH_DUMP (Advanced Programmer's Kit only)l 2 BADBLOCKSl#MEDIA2 MEDIAa% ANALYZE/MEDIA [/qualifier[s]] ddnn: a /ALLOCATEa /BADBLOCKS /[NO]EXERCISE  /OVERRIDEo /RETRY /SHOWDB The ANALYZE/MEDIA command locates bad blocks on a disk volume andE records their locations in the last good block before the last trackeB on the disk. This information is then used by backup and restore> utilites and the INITALIZE command. See HELP BACKUP and HELP INITIALIZE. = In the command line, device specifies a physical device. The C specification consists of two alphanumeric characters followed by O. a 1- to 3-digit octal unit number and colon.  * ANALYZE/MEDIA qualifiers work as follows: YE /ALLOCATE:label Prompts you for blocks to be allocatedr9 to BADBLK.SYS and to be entered in the o9 bad block descriptor file.s < /BADBLOCKS Prompts you for additional bad blocksA /BADBLOCKS/EXERCISE:(n,m) which are entered in the bad blockiC descriptor file, after searching theeB disk for bad blocks. The /EXERCISE- qualifier specifies the double wordY1 data pattern used to locate bad blocks.oD /BADBLOCKS/NOEXERCISE Prompts you for additional bad blocks9 which are entered in the bad block o/ descriptor file.fF /[NO]EXERCISE[:(n,m)] Specifies the double word data pattern ) used to locate bad blocks.  < /OVERRIDE Ignores the last track information on5 a last-track device, and creates a bad E block descriptor file on the last goodl; block before the last track.y7 /RETRY Force I/O driver to retry bad blocksrC /SHOW Lists bad block numbers as they are  located. 2 ERROR_LOG @DCLANALER 2 CRASH_DUMP @DCLANALCDn ) used to locate bad blocks.  < /OVERRIDE Ignores the last track information on5 a last-track device, and creates a bad E block descriptor file on the last goodl; block before the last track.y7 /RETRY Force I/O driver to retry bad blocksrC /SHOW Lists bad block numbers as they are  ) APPEND[/qualifier[s]] infile[,s] outfilee /DATE:dd-mmm-yyA /NOWARNINGSd /REWINDo /SHARED  /SINCE:dd-mmm-yyi /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy* /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAY /EXCLUDE:filespec # APPEND/ERROR_LOG filespec[/DELETE].D APPEND attaches to an existing sequential file records from one or D more sequential files. Note that APPEND does not delete the input D files. A copy of each input file is placed, in the order indicated/ in the command, at the end of the output file.eA See HELP APPEND qualifier for help on that qualifier. See also & HELP CONVERT for nonsequential files.- Example: $ APPEND RAY.MAC,JAY.MAC LITE.MAC HD Appends to output file LITE.MAC the input files RAY.MAC and JAY.MAC2 DATE) APPEND/DATE:dd-mmm-yy infile[,s] outfile L Specifies that the operation is limited to input files from the given date.0 Example: $ APPEND/DATE:04-AUG-80 *.MAC PILL.MAC: Appends all .MAC files created on that date to PILL.MAC. 2 SINCEf* APPEND/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy infile[,s] outfileL Specifies that the operation is limited to input files created on or after O the given date. Can be combined with /THROUGH. See also HELP APPEND THROUGH.I M Examples: f- $ APPEND/SINCE:04-AUG-80 *.*;* ROMEO.TXTdE Appends to ROMEO.TXT all files created on or after that date.t? $ APPEND/SINCE:08-OCT-81/THROUGH:10-OCT-81 *.TXT SIMON.TXTGB Appends to SIMON.TXT all files included in the date range.2 THRU#THROUGH 2 THROUGHP /, APPEND/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy infile[,s] outfileM Specifies that the operation is limited to input files created on or before dJ the given date. Can be combined with /SINCE. See also HELP APPEND SINCE. Examples:5 $ APPEND/THROUGH:01-MAY-81 AURORA.* BOREALIS.SYM > Appends to BOREALIS.SYM all files named AURORA created on or  before that date.8 ? $ APPEND/SINCE:09-SEP-81/THROUGH:09-OCT-81 *.TXT RECORD.FILlB Appends to RECORD.FIL all .TXT files created in the date range. A2 TODAYG APPEND/TODAY infile[,s] outfileN Specifies that the operation is limited to input files created on the current date. Example o ! $ APPEND/TODAY RAT.* TAR.RATN6 Appends to TAR.RAT all files named RAT created today. 2 EXCLUDEA+ APPEND/EXCLUDE:filespec infile[,s] outfilenA Appends all input files to the output file, except for the file P$ specified in the filespec argument. Example:  ) $ APPEND/EXCLUDE:*.OBJ RAY.* VAC.FIL G Appends to VAC.FIL all files named RAY, with the exception of RAY.OBJ.i 2 NOWARNINGS& APPEND/NOWARNINGS infile[,s] outfile Suppresses error messages.2 REWIND p" APPEND/REWIND infile[,s] outfileF The /REWIND qualifier applies only to files that are on tape. This A qualifier rewinds the tape before starting an append operation.a2 SHARED" APPEND/SHARED infile[,s] outfileE The /SHARED qualifier permits other users to access the input file A while you append it. 2 ERROR_LOG# APPEND/ERROR_LOG filespec[/DELETE],> APPEND/ERROR_LOG appends the specified file to the end of theI current Error Log File. Error Logging must be active for this qualifierEE to work. The default is to keep the current Error Log File as well C as the appended file. The /DELETE qualifier deletes the specifiedt? file after it has been appended to the current Error Log File., outfileE The /SHARED qualifier permits other users to access the input file A while you append i1 ASSIGN[/qualifier[s]] physicalddnn: logicalddnn:a /LOCAL /LOGINi /GLOBAL /SYSTEM /TERMINAL:ddnn:- ASSIGN/TASK:taskname ddnn: logicalunitnumberi" ASSIGN/REDIRECT oldddnn: newddnn:E The ASSIGN command associates a logical name with a physical device.nD After you issue this command, all references to the logical device D name are interpreted by the system to mean the associated physical C device. Note, both physical device names and logical device namesL have the format ddnn:. @ For more information on the above qualifers, including TASK and& REDIRECT, type HELP ASSIGN qualifier. n: For information about assigning queues to processors, see HELP ASSIGN QUEUE. 2 SYSTEM#GLOBALS2 GLOBAL) ASSIGN/GLOBAL physicalddnn: logicalddnn:e) ASSIGN/SYSTEM physicalddnn: logicalddnn:rG The /GLOBAL qualifier specifies that the logical name assignment applyaB to all tasks running in the system. Only privileged terminals may define global assignments. 0 The /SYSTEM qualifier is a synonym for /GLOBAL.2 LOCALe( ASSIGN/LOCAL physicalddnn: logicalddnn:G Local assignments apply only to tasks and commands initiated from thepG terminal used to make the assignments. Local logical names exist onlySE for the terminal from which you defined them. This is the default.g2 LOGINr( ASSIGN/LOGIN physicalddnn: logicalddnn:A The /LOGIN qualifier assigns the logical name SY0: to the user's.E system disk, which is the device that contains the user's files whenY the user logs in. y4 Only privileged users may define login assignments. 2 REDIRECT" ASSIGN/REDIRECT oldddnn: newddnn:@ The ASSIGN/REDIRECT command redirects all I/O requests from oneE physical device to another physical device. Use this command when aoE device is unavailable, and there is another device that can take itsO0 place. The devices need not be the same type. A The ASSIGN/REDIRECT command may only be issued from a privilegedc terminal.- The following devices may not be redirected:e The pseudo device TI0:l An attached device % A device containing a mounted volumeGD Note, spooled printers are attached devices. They can be redirectedC by reassigning the queues assigned to them. See HELP ASSIGN QUEUE..2 TASK- ASSIGN/TASK:taskname ddnn: logicalunitnumberhC The ASSIGN/TASK command reassigns an installed task's logical unit F numbers (LUNs) from one physical device to another. The reassignment< overrides the static LUN in the task's disk image file. TheE ASSIGN/REDIRECT command is used for dynamic device reconfiguration. dF The command does not affect memory-resident tasks. Hence, ASSIGN/TASKG has no effect on the assignments of a currently executing task, nor ont! a task that is fixed in memory. K< This command may be issued only from a privileged terminal. 2 TERMINAL1 ASSIGN/TERMINAL:ddnn: physicalddnn: logicalddnn:e@ The /TERMINAL qualifier applies the requested local assignment < to another terminal. This command may be issued only from a privileged terminal. A This qualifier may be used in conjunction with /LOCAL or /LOGIN. 2 QUEUEr@DCLASSQ tasks. Hence, ASSIGN/TASKG has no effect on the assignments of a currently executing task, nor ont! a task that is fixed in memory. K< This command may be issued only from a privileged terminal. 2 TERMINAL1 ASSIGN/TERMINAL:ddnn: physicalddnn: logicalddnn:e@ The /TERMINAL qualifier applies the requested local assignment < to another terminal. This command may be issued only from a privilege% ASSIGN/QUEUE queuename processorname > The ASSIGN/QUEUE command establishes a path from a queue to a processor. D You may assign a queue to more than one processor or assign several queues to the same processor. G When used in conjunction with the DEASSIGN/QUEUE command, ASSIGN/QUEUEG can be used to redirect jobs in a queue from one processor to another. See HELP DEASSIGN QUEUE.  @ BACKUP[/qualifier[s]] sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:C The BACKUP command backs up and restores Files-11 volumes. BACKUPo? copies files from one volume to another volume (or volumes) soe< that copies of the files are available in case the original@ files are destroyed. If you need to retrieve these copies, the$ BACKUP command also restores them. G The source field specifies the device containing the input volume. TheEG data is transferred from this volume. The source field may optionallyUF include from 1 to 16 file specifications, which select specific filesD for copying. The destination field specifies the device containingG the output volume: the data is transferred to this volume. Source andhG destination fields can specify either disk or tape units, although at $ least one of these must be a disk. ? See HELP BACKUP QUALIFIERS for a list of qualifiers. See also h1 HELP BACKUP EXAMPLES for some command examples. s2 APPEND8 BACKUP/APPEND sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:E The /APPEND qualifier adds new data to a tape that already contains cH one or more backup sets. You can also add new data to a disk by using 2 the /IMAGE qualifier after the /APPEND qualifier.D If you position the tape at the beginning, /APPEND causes a skip toF the logical end-of-tape before writing the new backup set. If you doE not position the tape at the beginning, /APPEND starts writing whereoF the tape is currently positioned. If you want to start writing at the@ logical end-of-tape and you have not positioned the tape at itsC beginning, specify /APPEND/REWIND, which rewinds the tape and thena2 spaces forward to the logical end of the volume. E If the output device is a disk, /APPEND/IMAGE starts writing at thebD logical end-of-file. However, if the output disk is a continuationF disk (that is, not the first disk in a set) or if the last backup set: does not end on the disk, an error message is displayed. D You cannot use the /APPEND qualifier during a backup operation to a mounted disk. o 2 SAVE_SET? BACKUP/SAVE_SET:name sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn: E The /SAVE_SET qualifier allows you to specify the name of the backup D set to be placed on the tape or disk. For tape and for an unmountedG disk, the default name is the volume name of the disk being backed up. D This name may be up to 12(10) characters long. For a mounted inputE or output disk during an image backup or restore operation, you can sD specify the full backup set file name with the /SAVE_SET qualifier.E If you do not specify the file name, the default is [0,0]BACKUP.SYS.a C When applied to an output tape volume, the backup set name assignstA the name of the backup set being placed on the volume. Multiple F backup sets may be placed on a single volume. If you do not specify aD backup set name for the output volume, the volume name of the input& disk is used to name the backup set. E When applied to an input tape volume, the first tape is searched forsH the specified backup set name. If you do not specify a backup set name E with the input volume, the first backup set on the tape is restored.tE Note that the first tape in the backup set is not rewound unless youb specify /REWIND. C When this qualifier is applied to an input disk volume, the entire F disk is searched for each backup set you specify. Each backup set isB then restored in the order of the backup set names you provided. 2 OUTVOLUMEu#LABEL2 OUTPUT#LABEL 2 INVOLUME#LABEL2 INPUTe#LABEL2 LABEL ; BACKUP/LABEL:arg sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:u OUTPUT:volumelabels INPUT:volumelabel TAPE:fileset-IDE The /LABEL qualifier changes or checks volume labels and volume-IDs # for backup and restore operations.a nD The default is /LABEL:OUTPUT:volumelabel. This default allows you ; also to specify the volume label of the output disk using f /LABEL:volumelabel. o r0 The arguments to /LABEL are mutually exclusive.6 See HELP BACKUP LABEL labeltype for more information. 3 OUTVOLUMEd#OUTPUTp3 OUTPUT aL BACKUP/LABEL:[OUTPUT:]volumelabel sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn: eK The /LABEL:OUTPUT qualifier specifies the volume label of the output disk.s1 This label can be up to 12 characters in length.d uE The default is /LABEL:OUTPUT:volumelabel. The default allows you toeF specify the volume label of the output disk with /LABEL:volumelabel. ? For disk-to-tape backup operations, the name of the input disk E volume, which is stored on the output tape volume, is changed to the2 name specified with the /LABEL:OUTPUT qualifier.  dG For tape-to-disk restore operations or for disk-to-disk transfers, theiE name of the output disk volume is changed to the name specified with  the /LABEL:OUTPUT qualifier.e 3 INVOLUME#INPUT3 INPUTeI BACKUP/LABEL:INPUT:volumelabel sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:i wI The /LABEL:INPUT qualifier specifies the volume label of the input disk.f+ This name can be up to 12 characters long.  F For disk-to-tape or disk-to-disk operations, the volume label of the G input volume is checked to verify that the disk has the correct label.t= This check ensures that you do not back up the wrong volume.g tK For restore operations, BACKUP checks the volume label of the disk that isP" stored in the backup set on tape.3 TAPEG BACKUP/LABEL:TAPE:fileset-ID sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:f F The /LABEL:TAPE qualifier specifies the 6-character volume identifierG on the ANSI VOL1 label to be placed on the tape during a backup opera-hI tion or to be compared with the label on the tape for append and restoresH operations. This qualifier allows you to verify that you are using the  correct tape. 2 BADBLOCKSeIBACKUP/INITIALIZE/BADBLOCKS:arg sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:b [AUTOMATIC] MANUAL/ OVERRIDEt@ The /BADBLOCKS qualifier is used with the /INITIALIZE qualifier1 during tape-to-disk or disk-to-disk operations. iC For last-track devices, AUTOMATIC creates the file BADBLK.SYS fromeC the manufacturer's bad-block information and the software-detectednD bad sector file. For nonlast-track devices, the software bad-block 0 descriptor block is used to create BADBLK.SYS. E MANUAL specifies that both the manufacturer-written bad-block infor-bC mation and either the software-detected bad sector file or the badBB block descriptor block be used to create BADBLK.SYS. Also, MANUALH accepts the addresses of bad blocks entered manually from the terminal.D OVERRIDE applies only to last-track devices, causing the last-trackG device to appear to be a nonlast-track device. This qualifier makes a eG disk appear not to have bad-block information in the last track, even K) if this information is actually present.a 2 ACCESSEDN BACKUP/INITIALIZE/ACCESSED:fcbcount sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:G The /ACCESSED qualifier specifies the number of directory File ControlUG Blocks (FCBs) per volume kept in memory by the ACP. The more FCBs thataF are kept in memory, the faster the files are found. The default value< for fcbcount is the same as the default for the input disk.F The /ACCESSED qualifier is used with the /INITIALIZE qualifier during) tape-to-disk or disk-to-disk operations.u 2 COMPAREt: BACKUP/COMPARE sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn: C The /COMPARE qualifier compares the data on the output device withiC the data on the input device and reports any differences. No datae2 transfer takes place during a /COMPARE operation.G You must compare equivalent volumes. You can assure that the volumes oF are equivalent by including the /COMPARE qualifier in a command that H is otherwise identical to the BACKUP command used to create the output  volume. 2 CREATEDuN BACKUP/CREATED/BEFORE:(dd-mmm-yy [hh:mm:ss]) source:[filespec[s]] destinationB The /CREATED qualifier allows you to select for backup or restoreK operations files created either on and before or after the specified date a and time.F You must specify either a date or a time. If you specify both a dateE and time, the date and time must be enclosed in parentheses. If you < specify only a date or only a time, the parentheses are notA necessary. If you specify only a time, today's date is assumed. B1 /BEFORE and /AFTER are also used with /MODIFIED.i 2 DENSITYd= BACKUP/DENSITY:arg sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:c 800r 1600 6250G The /DENSITY qualifier specifies the density at which a magnetic tapet is to be written. G If you specify /DENSITY with /APPEND, you must specify the density attE which the old tape data was written. If you specify a density othera? than the original density, a warning message is displayed ande. processing continues at the correct density.G If you specify an incorrect density for a restore operation, an errorE7 message is displayed and the operation is terminated.0 2 DIRECTORY  BACKUP/NOINITIALIZE/DIRECTORYF The /DIRECTORY qualifer directs BACKUP to create UFDs (if they do notI already exist) on a mounted output volume, then copy into these UFDs the J files from the analogous UFDs on the input volume. If you do not specifyD /DIRECTORY, BACKUP does not copy the file. /DIRECTORY is used only" with the /NOINITIALIZE qualifier.2 LIST BACKUP/LIST sourceddnn:& BACKUP/SAVE_SET:name/LIST sourceddnn:> The /LIST qualifier can be used to list the backup sets on a . volume, or to list the files in a backup set.C When specified with no backup set name, /LIST lists all the backupaE sets on the volume. If a continuation tape is mounted when you enterfG the command, only the backup sets on that volume, and not those on theG first or previous volumes, are listed. The continuation tape number ist also listed.L= When used in conjunction with the /SAVE_SET qualifier, /LISTSB causes the files in the specified backup set to be listed. If theE backup set is not on the tape, an error message is displayed and the operation is terminated.a2 NOLOGn#LOG2 LOGs9 BACKUP/[NO]LOG sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:pC The /LOG qualifier causes the file name and UFD of each file beingt3 transferred to be printed. The default is /NOLOG.l 2 ERROR_LIMITd BACKUP/ERROR_LIMIT:nuG The /ERROR_LIMIT qualifier requests termination of a restore operationaF after the specified number of nonfatal tape read errors, n, has been reached. The default is /ERROR_LIMIT:25. 2 EXAMPLES4 Example of a complete disk copy to a 1600 bpi tape:' $ BACKUP/DENSITY:1600 DU2: MM0:eE Example of a copy from tape to disk, initializing the disk and using prompting:o $ BACKUP/DENSITY:1600 From? MM1:i To? DK2:u# INITIALIZE THE OUTPUT DISK? YESCE Example of a disk-to-disk transfer from a mounted disk, initializing  the output disk: $ BACKUP/INITIALIZE/MOUNTED From? DB0:a To? DB3:,- Example of a multiple disk backup operation:L3 $ BACKUP/INITIALIZE/IMAGE:SAVE/VERIFY/MOUNTy From? DL0: To? DY0:. Example of a multiple disk restore operation:0 $ BACKUP/INITIALIZE/IMAGE:RESTORE/VERIFY From? DL0: To? DY0: 2 EXCLUDE?4 BACKUP/EXCLUDE sourceddnn:filespec destinationddnn:G The /EXCLUDE qualifier specifes that a file matching the file specifi-oB cation in the source field be excluded from the backup or restoreB operation. You can specify more than one file by using wildcards. 2 EXTENSIONLH BACKUP/INITIALIZE/EXTENSION:n sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:? The /EXTENSION qualifier specifies the number of blocks a fileI? is extended after that file has exhausted its allocated space. E The /EXTENSION qualifier is used in conjunction with the /INITIALIZEn: qualifier during tape-to-disk or disk-to-disk operations. 2 HEADERSeF BACKUP/INITIALIZE/HEADERS:n sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:F The /HEADERS qualifier specifies the number of file headers, n, to be> allocated initially to the index file. The primary reason forF preallocating file headers is to locate them near the storage bit mapC file. Proper placement of file headers can help reduce head motionc during I/O operations. C The /HEADERS qualifier is used in conjunction with the /INITIALIZEr; qualifier during tape-to-disk and disk-to-disk operations. 2 INITIALIZE #NOINITIALIZEn2 LENGTH: BACKUP/LENGTH:n sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:F The /LENGTH qualifier specifies the length of the output tape, n, in @ decimal feet. If the length specified exceeds the length of theC tape, the entire length of the output tape is used. In cases wherefA you know the end of the tape must not be used, you can specify aC shorter length to ensure that you do not write on that part of ther tape. i2 MAXIMUM_FILES-L BACKUP/INITIALIZE/MAXIMUM_FILES:n sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:D The /MAXIMUM_FILES qualifier specifies the maximum number of files,E n, that can be placed on a volume. This number is determined by thee? number of file headers in the volume's index file. The defaulte; maximum is the maximum number of files on the input disk. u 2 MOUNTEDn9 BACKUP/MOUNTED sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:lH The /MOUNTED qualifier allows you to back up or restore files which are0 on volumes that are mounted as File-11 volumes.I Normally, both the source and destination devices are mounted as foreigncD devices, but by using the /MOUNTED qualifier, the source device mayI be mounted as a Files-11 device. However, files being transferred should'4 not be modified while the transfer is taking place. 2 NEW_VERSIONn= BACKUP/NEW_VERSION sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:eF The /NEW_VERSION qualifier resolves file specification conflicts thatI occur during restore operations and during backups to mounted disks wheneE using the /IMAGE:SAVE qualifier. When a file already exists on the D output disk volume, /NEW_VERSION creates a new version of the file.4 See HELP BACKUP REPLACE for alternative qualifiers.2 IMAGEtF BACKUP/INITIALIZE/IMAGE:arg sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn: SAVE O RESTORE@ /IMAGE specifies that you want to do a multivolume disk-to-diskB backup or restore operation. If you are doing a backup operationC you must specify the SAVE option on the command line. If you wantAB to do a restore operation, you must specify the RESTORE option on the command line.? If you want to do a backup operation, you must use /IMAGE:SAVEtB when you create the backup file that represents the image copy ofC the input disk or disks. For example, this qualifier must be used B when you copy a large disk to several small disks, or if you copy- several small disks to a mounted large disk. C If you want to do a restore operation, you must use /IMAGE:RESTOREtA when restoring from a backup file that represents the image copyt of the original disk.2 NOINITIALIZE@ BACKUP/[NO]INITIALIZE sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:D The /INITIALIZE qualifier specifies that you want to initialize theG output volume during a tape-to-disk or disk-to-disk operation. Initia-eE lization places a Files-11 structure on the disk, including the boot6 block, the home block, and the required system files.J Along with the /INITIALIZE qualifier, you can specify one or more of the F following qualifier(s) when you are initializing a disk: /BADBLOCKS, L /ACCESSED, /EXTENSION, /HEADERS, /MAXIMUM_FILES, /INDEX, /FILE_PROTECTION, K and /WINDOWS. If you do not specify any of these qualifiers, the defaults e of the input disk are used.D /NOINITIALIZE specifies that you do not want to initialize the diskE because it already has a Files-11 structure. The output disk must bek: mounted as a Files-11 volume. You cannot enter any of the8 initialization qualifiers listed above when you specify /NOINITIALIZE. E When you are restoring files to a mounted volume, the file system isHF used to access the output device. Therefore, a restore operation to aE mounted volume is slower than a restore operation to an unmounted volume. e 2 NOPRESERVE #PRESERVEi 2 PRESERVE> BACKUP/[NO]PRESERVE sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:G The /[NO]PRESERVE qualifier specifies that you do not want to preserveY file-IDs. eH When file-IDs are not preserved, new file-IDs are assigned, starting at 6 and incremented sequentially. 2 SUPERSEDEo#REPLACE 2 NOSUPERSEDEl#REPLACE 2 NOREPLACEa#REPLACE 2 POSITION#INDEX2 INDEXeF BACKUP/INITIALIZE/INDEX:arg sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn: BEGINNING MIDDLE ENDR nD The /INDEX qualifier specifies where on the output volume the indexD file is to be placed. This qualifier can be used to force the indexF file, the Master File Directory, and the storage allocation file to a@ specific location on the disk, usually to minimize access time.H The default location is the same location as that of the index file on  the input disk. 2 PROTECTION#FILE_PROTECTION2 FILE_PROTECTIONuJ BACKUP/INITIALIZE/FILE_PROTECTION:(code) source:[filespec[s]] destinationD The /FILE_PROTECTION qualifier specifies the default protection for? all new files created on the disk after the backup transfer ise= complete. Each access code consists of a positional keywordlB specifying the protection group (SYSTEM:, OWNER:, GROUP:, WORLD:)C followed by a 4-code group specifying the protection, as follows: t R - allow read access to file W - allow write access to fileT E - allow file to be extended D - allow file to be deletedNE If this qualifier is not specified, the defaults from the input diske are used.' The default system protection code is:c, (SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER,RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R) 2 QUALIFIERS1 The following qualifers can be used with BACKUP:$ /ACCESSED /APPEND /BADBLOCKS:arg- /COMPARE /CREATED/BEFORE:date AUTOMATICd /AFTER:date MANUAL t' /DENSITY:arg /DIRECTORY OVERRIDEe 800 /ERROR_LIMIT:n c 1600 /EXCLUDE /EXTENSION:n+ 6250 /FILE_PROTECTION:(code) /HEADERS:n( /IMAGE:arg /INDEX:arg /[NO]INITIALIZE) SAVE BEGINNING /LABEL:arg3 RESTORE MIDDLE OUTPUT:labelR* /LENGTH:n END INPUT:label0 /LIST n TAPE:fileset-ID1 /[NO]LOG /MAXIMUM_FILES:n /MODIFIED/BEFORE:dateO- /MOUNTED /NEW_VERSION /AFTER:date % /[NO]PRESERVE /[NO]REPLACE /REWIND 3 /SAVE_SET:name /VERIFY /WINDOWS:n HFor more information on the above qualifiers, type HELP BACKUP qualifer.G B 2 REVISEDA #MODIFIED 2 MODIFIEDA BACKUP/MODIFIED/BEFORE:(dd-mmm-yy [hh:mm:ss]) source destination /AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy [hh:mm:ss])F The /MODIFIED qualifier allows you to select for a backup or restore D operation files that are revised either on and before or after the  specified date and time./H If you specify both a date and time, the date and time must be enclosedD in parentheses. If you specify only a date or only a time, today's  date is assumed.  0 /BEFORE and /AFTER are also used with /CREATED.2 REWIND8 BACKUP/REWIND sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:F The /REWIND qualifier causes the first magnetic tape of a tape set to; be rewound before executing a backup or restore operation.nE When specified with an input tape, the first tape of the tape set ist/ rewound before it is searched for backup sets.iG When specified with /APPEND, the first tape of the tape set is rewoundyD and then searched for the logical end of the last backup set before executing the backup operation. 2 REPLACED9 BACKUP/REPLACE sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:H The /REPLACE qualifier specifies that, when a file specification on the@ output volume is identical to a file specification on the inputG volume, the file on the output volume is deleted and replaced with theu file from the input volume.F For an /IMAGE operation, if you create a backup set file on a mountedD volume and a file with the same name exists, /REPLACE replaces this file.A The default is /NOREPLACE. No files are deleted, but a warning C message is issued.c: See HELP BACKUP NEW_VERSION for an alternative qualifier.2 VERIFY8 BACKUP/VERIFY sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:C The /VERIFY qualifier compares the input and output volumes, aftereG data transfer is complete, to verify that the transfer was carried outa successfully. n 2 WINDOWSeF BACKUP/INITIALIZE/WINDOWS:n sourceddnn:[filespec[s]] destinationddnn:D The /WINDOWS qualifier specifies the number of mapping pointers, n,F to be allocated for file windows. A file window consists of a number @ of pointers which are stored in memory when the file is opened.F The default number of mapping pointers is the same as the default for the input disk. and output volumes, aftereG data transfer is complete, to verify that the transfer was carried outa successfully. n 2 WINDOWSeF BACKUP/INITIALIZE/W BROADCAST ttnn: message BROADCAST username message  BROADCAST[/qualifier] message /ALL /LOGGED_IN BROADCAST @indirectfilespecI The BROADCAST command sends a one-line message to one or more terminals.aG In the command line, ttnn: is the terminal where you want the message F to be sent. If you do not specify ttnn:, the message is sent to the ( system console. Also see HELP REQUEST.G You can also send a message to a user by specifying the user's name. AF Such a message is sent to all terminals at which that user is logged  in.E The /ALL qualifier sends the message to all terminals in the system.T! This is a privileged qualifier. T< The /LOGGED_IN qualifier sends the message to all terminalsC currently logged onto the system. This is a privileged qualifier. F Both privileged and nonprivileged users can send messages to multipleD terminals through an indirect command file. The file specificationF for the indirect command must have the type of .CMD. The text of the) indirect command file should look like: e ttnn:message/ ttnn:messagee . . . ttnn:messagem@ Privileged users can use the /ALL and /LOGGED_IN qualifiers in  an indirect command file. Command abbreviation: Bto the system. This is a privileged qualifier. F Both privileged and nonprivileged users can send messages to multipleD terminals through an indirect command file. The file specificationF for the indirect command must have the type of .CMD. The tex CANCEL tasknameD The CANCEL command cancels the clock queue entries of an installed G task. A task's entries are placed in the clock queue through the RUN$D directive or any of the time-synchronized variations of the DCL RUND command. Note that CANCEL does not affect a task that is currently executing. ? Nonprivileged users can only cancel the entries of a task thati@ initiated at the same terminal from which the CANCEL command is? issued. Privileged users can cancel any clock queue entries. N tasknameD The CANCEL command cancels the clock queue entries of an installed G task. A task's entries are placed in the clock queue through the RUN$D directive or any of the time-synchronized variations of the DCL RUND command. Note that CANCEL does not affect a task that is currently executing. ? Nonprivileged users can only cancel the entries of a task thati@ initiated at the same terminal from which the CANCEL command is? issued. Privileged users can cancel any clock queue en% CONTINUE[/TERMINAL:ttnn:] [taskname]G The CONTINUE command resumes execution of a previously suspended task.= When a SPND$S directive within a task executes, the task is D suspended. (Note that continuing a suspended task is different from* starting a stopped one. See HELP START.): If a taskname is not specified, the task running at your A terminal, which was initiated by the RUN command, is continued. N> The /TERMINAL qualifier allows a privileged user to continue 9 a suspended task that is running on some other terminal.eG The CONTINUE command resumes execution of a previously suspended task.= When a SPND$S directive within a task executes, the task is D suspended. (Note that continuing a suspended task is different from* starting a stopped one. See HELP START.): If a taskname is not specified, the task running at your A terminal, which was initiated by the RUN command, is continued. N> The /TERMINAL qualifier allows a privileged user to continue 9 a suspended task & CONVERT[/qualifier[s]] infile outfile /[NO]APPEND /BLOCK_SIZE:n /[NO]FIXED_CONTROLR /[NO]IDENTIFICATION /INDEXED5 /KEY[:n]Z /[NO]LOG_FILE[:filespec]E /[NO]MASS_INSERT  /MERGE /[NO]PAD[:[#]arg]o /RELATIVE /[NO]REPLACEC /SEQUENTIAL! /[NO]TRUNCATE D The CONVERT command invokes the RMSCNV utility which moves records H from one file to another. RMSCNV reads records from an input file and A writes them to an output file. The action of RMSCNV depends on M> the organization - sequential, relative, or indexed - of the G two files, and on the qualifiers you include in the CONVERT command. ZD See HELP CONVERT qualifier, HELP CONVERT FILESPEC, and HELP CONVERTD EXAMPLES for additional information. Also see the main text and the0 RMS-11 documentation supplied with your system.2 INFILE #FILESPECc 2 OUTFILEo #FILESPEC 2 FILESPEC& CONVERT[/qualifier[s]] infile outfile infilenG Specifies the file that is the source of records to be written to the eG output file. CONVERT reads input records sequentially, regardless of nA the organization of the input file. No wildcards are permitted.H outfileH Specifies the file that is to receive the records from the input file. F The default file organization for the output file is sequential. If B the output file is not sequential, use the /RELATIVE or /INDEXED F qualifier to indicate the organization. If the output file is to be E sequential, CONVERT can create the file; it need not exist prior to F your entering the CONVERT command. CONVERT cannot create indexed or E relative files; these must have been created prior to your entering 4 the CONVERT command. No wildcards are permitted. 2 NOAPPEND#APPEND 2 APPEND" CONVERT/[NO]APPEND infile outfile< Directs RMSCNV to append records to the end of an existing G sequential file. If the output file is not sequential, RMSCNV ignorestE the qualifier. You cannot use both /APPEND and /REPLACE in the same  command line. C The default is /NOAPPEND. If you both use this default and specifyrE /REPLACE in the command line, RMSCNV performs the replace operation;oF that is, it supercedes the existing sequential file. However, if youC do not specify /REPLACE, RMSCNV creates the next higher version of the file. SA This qualifier is the equivalent of the /AP switch in an RMSCNV I command line. 2 BLOCK_SIZE$ CONVERT/BLOCK_SIZE:n infile outfileE Specifies the physical block size of an output file being created on H magtape, where n can be from 18 through 8192 characters. RMSCNV roundsE this value up to the next multiple of 4. If you do not specify this; qualifier, the default tape block size is 512 characters. rA This qualifier is the equivalent of the /BL switch in an RMSCNV r command line.2 NOFIXED_CONTROLl#FIXED_CONTROL2 FIXED_CONTROLP) CONVERT/[NO]FIXED_CONTROL infile outfileL7 The /FIXED_CONTROL qualifier directs RMSCNV to handle sF variable-with-fixed-control (VFC) format records in either the input G file or the output file. If the fixed-control area of the input file u: and the output file are the same size, RMSCNV performs a H straightforward copy. See the RMS-11 documentation supplied with your F system for information on how RMSCNV handles other combinations. If K you include this qualifier and neither file specifies VFC records, RMSCNV C terminates.A This qualifier is the equivalent of the /WF switch in an RMSCNV  command line.G The default is /NOFIXED_CONTROL. This means that if one of the named F files contains VFC records, the fixed-control area of each record is C ignored. That is, if the input file includes VFC records and the C output file does not, only the variable portion of each record is E written to the output file; if the output file includes VFC records fE and the input file does not, data is written only into the variable T portion of each output record.f2 NOIDENTIFICATION#IDENTIFICATIONa2 IDENTIFICATION* CONVERT/[NO]IDENTIFICATION infile outfileG Requests that RMSCNV print its current version number and patch level F on your terminal. See the RMSCNV documentation for more information.A This qualifier is the equivalent of the /ID switch in an RMSCNV 1 command line. The default is /NOIDENTIFICATION.h 2 INDEXEDl CONVERT/INDEXED infile outfileeJ The /INDEXED qualifier informs RMSCNV that the output file is of indexed B organization. Regardless of their organization, all input files  are read sequentially. FF RMSCNV reads each record from the input file, then applies the outputG file's record format, that is, the key placement within the record, tonF the data. If you do not specify the /KEY qualifier with a value, theB key of reference is the primary key; otherwise, it is the key you specify. E This qualifier is the equivalent of the /FO:IDX switch in an RMSCNV  command line.2 KEYf CONVERT/KEY[:n] infile outfile.G Indicates the key that establishes the order in which records are readyB sequentially from an indexed input file and written to the outputC file. n can be from 0 through 9. The default is n=0 and indicatestB the primary key; n=1 is the first alternate key; n=9 is the ninth alternate key. A This qualifier is the equivalent of the /KR switch in an RMSCNV  command line. 2 NOLOG_FILE #LOG_FILEv 2 LOG_FILE/ CONVERT/[NO]LOG_FILE[:filespec] infile outfile A Directs RMSCNV to summarize processing in a log. If you do not aG include a filespec, the log appears on your terminal. If you name a e8 file, RMSCNV creates and writes to that file. The log ! includes the following elements: A The command string in RMSCNV format. This will not be the same  as DCL format.t a8 Copies of all error messages produced during execution.= An indication of any duplicate-key problems. If the log is @ appearing on the terminal, the indications consist only of the  following message:i$ SOME DUPLICATE RECORDS NOT WRITTENF If the log is being written to a file, RMSCNV supplies the indicator G DUP RCD= followed by the first 72 characters of the record that could  not be written.A This qualifier is the equivalent of the /SL switch in an RMSCNV e command line.D The default is /NOLOG, which means that only normal error messages  appear on your terminal.t2 NOMASS_INSERTI #MASS_INSERT 2 MASS_INSERT ' CONVERT/[NO]MASS_INSERT infile outfileyE Directs RMSCNV to activate the RMS-11 mass insert I/O technique and F then use sequential put operations to insert records into the output  file.D This is the equivalent of the /MA switch in an RMSCNV command line.E The default for nonsequential file organization is /NOMASS_INSERT. M2 MERGEm CONVERT/MERGE infile outfileNK Directs RMSCNV to copy records from the input file into the output file. / Both files must be of the same organization. C2 NOPADO#PAD2 PADi$ CONVERT/PAD[:[#]arg] infile outfileE Directs RMSCNV to adjust the record length of the input file to thatpB of the output file before writing the records to the output file.G RMSCNV accomplishes this adjustment by adding extra characters, calleduF pad characters, to the input file's records. Use this qualifier only6 when the output file specifies fixed-length records. D If you specify the qualifier without an argument, the pad character? is blank (40). If you do not include the number sign (#), theEE argument can be any printing ASCII character except the number sign,lB question mark (?), or commercial at-sign (@). If you include the= number sign (#), n can be an octal number between 0 and 377,uD representing the full ASCII character set. This enables you to useE the three excluded characters as pad characters by specifying 43 forc #, 77 for ?, and 100 for @. I This qualifier is the equivalent of the /PD switch in an RMSCNV command n line. 2 RELATIVE CONVERT/RELATIVE infile outfileC The /RELATIVE qualifier informs RMSCNV that the output file is of nK relative organization. Regardless of their organization, all input files e are read sequentially. aF The /RELATIVE qualifier is the equivalent of the /FO:REL switch in an RMSCNV command line. > RMSCNV reads records from the input file and writes them intoG successive record cells of the output file, beginning with cell 1. IfnD RMSCNV encounters a cell containing a record, it terminates with anD error message. All records written to that point are in the output@ file. You should examine the two files to determine how far the processing went. 2 NOREPLACEf#REPLACE 2 REPLACEu# CONVERT/[NO]REPLACE infile outfilei@ The /REPLACE qualifier directs RMSCNV to supersede an existing E sequential file. RMSCNV replaces a file in the output account with H the same file name, type, and version number. You cannot use /REPLACE & and /APPEND in the same command line.F The /REPLACE qualifier is the equivalent of /SU in an RMSCNV command  line.E The default is /NOREPLACE, but the default action depends on whetherwF the command line includes an /APPEND or not. If you specify /APPEND,F RMSCNV performs the append operation. If you do not specify /APPEND,6 RMSCNV creates the next higher version of the file. 2 SEQUENTIAL" CONVERT/SEQUENTIAL infile outfileE The /SEQUENTIAL qualifier informs RMSCNV that the output file is of /M sequential organization. Regardless of their organization, all input files fM are read sequentially. The default output file organization for RMSCNV is l sequential. M This qualifier is the equivalent of the /FO:SEQ switch in an RMSCNV command N line. NL If you do not specify either the /APPEND or /REPLACE qualifier, the output : file need not exist before you issue the CONVERT command.G If the output file does not exist, RMSCNV creates the output file with M the record attributes of the input file. RMSCNV then reads records from thegC input file and writes them sequentially into the new output file. uE If the output file already exists, and the command does not include F the /APPEND qualifier, RMSCNV creates the next higher version of the F file. RMSCNV then reads records from the input file and writes them 6 sequentially into the new version of the output file.J If the output file exists, and you specify the /APPEND qualifier, RMSCNV E reads records from the input file and writes them sequentially into s: the output file, starting with the beginning of the file.K If the output file exists, and you specify the /REPLACE qualifier, RMSCNV mE reads records from the input file and writes them sequentially into G the output file, starting with the record position following the last f record already in the file. 2 NOTRUNCATE #TRUNCATEn 2 TRUNCATE$ CONVERT/[NO]TRUNCATE infile outfileD Directs RMSCNV to truncate the records that are read from the inputB file to the record length of the output file, before writing themG into the output file. The trailing bytes of the record are truncated.nF The default is /NOTRUNCATE. If you do not specify /TRUNCATE and the H input records are too long, RMSCNV terminates with the following error message:o7 CON -- INPUT AND OUTPUT RECORD SIZES DO NOT CORRESPONDl 2 EXAMPLES $ CONVERT  Input file? FOO.BART Output file? POOH.BARiF The output file does not exist. RMSCNV creates the sequential file6 POOH.BAR and copies the records from FOO.BAR into it. $ CONVERT FOO.BAR POOH.BAR4 This example is the equivalent of the previous one.( $ CONVERT/INDEXED GRIZZLY.BAR CROW.BARF RMSCNV reads each record of the input file GRIZZLY.BAR sequentiallyF and examines the contents in the primary key field, which is definedF as an attribute of CROW.BAR. RMSCNV then inserts the record into CROW.BAR. + $ CONVERT/RELATIVE/KEY:1 SAND.BAR MAX.BAR F RMSCNV reads the indexed input file SAND.BAR, using the firstF alternate key of the file to establish the sequence of access. ThenF RMSCNV writes the records sequentially into the empty relative output+ file MAX.BAR, starting with record cell 1.fF Note that the /RELATIVE qualifier refers to the organization of theF output file and the /KEY qualifier refers to the organization of the input file.: $ CONVERT/APPEND/SEQUENTIAL/KEY:2 RUNNING.BAR CORNER.BARF RMSCNV reads the indexed input file RUNNING.BAR, using the secondE alternate key of the file to establish the sequence of access. TheneF RMSCNV appends the records at the end of the existing sequential output file CORNER.BAR.F If the /APPEND qualifier had not been specified, RMSCNV would haveF created the next higher version of CORNER.BAR and written the records from RUNNING.BAR into it.4 $ CONVERT/RELATIVE/FIXED_CONTROL MAMA.BAR PAPA.BARF RMSCNV reads fixed-length records from the indexed input fileF MAMA.BAR, using (by default) the primary key of the file to establishB the sequence of access. RMSCNV writes the records sequentiallyF in a VFC format into the existing relative file PAPA.BAR. RecordF format is an attribute of each file. As each record is written, the+ first bytes become the fixed control area.R; $ CONVERT/TRUNCATE/BLOCK_SIZE:1024/APPEND/KEY:9 BRER.BAR V Output file? MM3:BRER.BCKMF RMSCNV reads the indexed input file BRER.BAR, using the file's ninthF alternate key to establish the sequence of access. The RMSCNV writesF the records to magnetic tape, truncating them to the output file'sF record length before adding them to the end of the existing file, and/ formatting the tape blocks to 1024 bytes each. As each record is written' COPY[/qualifier[s]] infile[s] outfilei /ALLOCATION:na /BLOCKSIZE:n /[NO]CONTIGUOUSp /DATE:dd-mmm-yyp /EXCLUDE:filespeci /NOWARNINGSu /OWN /OVERLAY /PRESERVE_DATE /REPLACE /REWINDe /SHAREDh /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy /[NO]SPAN_BLOCKS /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy( /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAYE The COPY command copies one or more input files to an output file. yC If you specify more than one input file, they are connected into af3 single output file in the order that you indicate. D COPY does not alter the organization of the file. See HELP CONVERT: for information on changing the organization of the file.. For addition help, type HELP COPY qualifier. Command abbreviation: C 2 BLOCKSIZEA# COPY/BLOCKSIZE:n infile[s] outfile D The /BLOCKSIZE qualifier defines the block size for magnetic tapes.E This qualifier allows you to write bigger blocks onto magnetic tape,oB thereby saving some of the space taken by gaps between records. D n can be either octal or decimal. Put a period after the n (n.) to indicate it is decimal.2 NOCONTIGUOUS #CONTIGUOUSo 2 CONTIGUOUS& COPY/[NO]CONTIGUOUS infile[s] outfile> The /CONTIGUOUS qualifier specifies that the output file must@ be contiguous. If this qualifier is not used, only files that 2 are already contiguous remain contiguous on disk.2 OWNi COPY/OWN infile[s] outfile F The /OWN qualifier changes the ownership of the output file from the G source UIC to the destination UIC. After this command executes, each H UIC owns a copy of the file. If you do not specify /OWN, the original  UIC owns both copies. 2 REPLACE] COPY/REPLACE infile[s] outfileeE If the output file has the same name, type, and version number as a sB file existing at the destination UIC, this qualifier deletes the 4 existing file and replaces it with the output file.2 NOSPAN_BLOCKSf #SPAN_BLOCKS 2 SPAN_BLOCKSh' COPY/[NO]SPAN_BLOCKS infile[s] outfile J The /[NO]SPAN_BLOCKS qualifier specifies whether records copied from diskI to magnetic tape will cross block boundaries or be transferred in recordD mode. /SPAN_BLOCKS cipies a file with records crossing block boun- ? daries; this is normally how a file is copied. If you specifye4 /NOSPAN_BLOCKS ,the file is copied in record mode. 2 DATE& COPY/DATE:dd-mmm-yy infile[s] outfileC The /DATE qualifier copies files created only on the given date. h2 SINCEN' COPY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy infile[s] outfileNE The /SINCE qualifier copies files created only on or after the givena date. pD You can combine /SINCE and /THROUGH to copy files created within a 1 range of dates. The format for this command is:o' COPY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yyi 2 THROUGHI) COPY/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy infile[s] outfilecB The /THROUGH qualifier copies files created only on or before the given date. AD You can combine /SINCE and /THROUGH to copy files created within a 1 range of dates. The format for this command is:e' COPY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy 2 TODAYe COPY/TODAY infile[s] outfilen6 The /TODAY qualifier copies files created today only. 2 EXCLUDE ( COPY/EXCLUDE:filespec infile[s] outfileE The /EXCLUDE qualifer copies all files except the file named in the mD file specification argument. The file specification argument must  contain a version number.? You can exclude more than one file from being copied by using cH wildcards (*) in the file specification argument. A wildcard can also % replace the required version number. 2 ALLOCATION" COPY/ALLOCATION infile[s] outfileG The /ALLOCATION qualifier defines the number of contiguous blocks for LD the ouput file. n is octal, unless you terminate it with a decimal point.t 2 NOWARNINGS" COPY/NOWARNINGS infile[s] outfile5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages.r 2 OVERLAY. COPY/OVERLAY infile[s] outfileeA The /OVERLAY qualifier rewrites an existing file, replacing the i= existing file's contents with the contents of the infile(s).eB The output file retains the file identification number (File-ID),E as well as the name, type, and version number, of the original file.r2 PRESERVE_DATEl% COPY/PRESERVE_DATE infile[s] outfileiA The /PRESERVE_DATE qualifier causes the output file to have the t! creation date of the input file.s2 REWIND COPY/REWIND infile[s] outfileF The /REWIND qualifier applies only to input files that are located onD magtape. This qualifier rewinds the tape before the copy operation starts.2 SHARED COPY/SHARED infile[s] outfileD The /SHARED qualifier permits other users to access the input file  while you copy it.inal file.r2 PRESERVE_DATEl% COPY/PRESERVE_DATE infile[s] outfileiA The /PRESERVE_DATE qualifier causes the output file to have the t! creation date of the input file.s2 REWIND COPY/REWIND infile[s] outfileF The /REWIND qualifier applies only to input files that are located onD magtape CREATE filespecB The CREATE command creates a sequential file on a file-structuredD device. After you issue the command, you type the text for the fileD on your terminal. You can delete a line with CTRL/U. You can closeE the file by typing a CTRL/Z. You can create a file in any directorya@ to which you have WRITE access. Usually, this will be your own= directory and other directories with the same group number. O> For information about creating directories, type HELP CREATE C DIRECTORY. For information about using the Control File Language eA (CFL) compiler to create intermediate form modules (IFORM), typem HELP CREATE CFL.t 2 DIRECTORYe* CREATE/DIRECTORY[/qualifier] [ddnn:][ufd] /ALLOCATION:nn /LABEL:volumelabel /NOWARNINGS  /OWNER_UIC$ /PROTECTION:(code)A The CREATE/DIRECTORY command adds a user file directory (UFD) tog? the Master File Directory (MFD). The format for the user filepG directory is [ufd], where ufd is from one to nine Radix-50 characters. C The Radix-50 characters are the letters of the alphabet, 0 throughM 9, $, period, and space. D Nonprivileged users can create a directory on a volume mounted on aB private device. The /NOSHAREABLE qualifier to the MOUNT command E makes a device private. Privileged users can create a directory on e any mounted volume. n dE The device specification, ddnn:, defaults to the device to which theTE user currently is set. The UFD defaults to the ufd to which the usere@ currently is set. Note that you must specify one of these two parameters. h5 For more help, type HELP CREATE DIRECTORY qualifier.v 3 ALLOCATION+ CREATE/DIRECTORY/ALLOCATION:n [ddnn:][ufd]aD The /ALLOCATION qualifier specifies the number of directory entriesD for which space is to be entered. The number provided is rounded up to the next multiple of 32. The default is /ALLOCATION:32.a 3 PROTECTION0 CREATE/DIRECTORY/PROTECTION:(code) [ddnn:][ufd]F The /PROTECTION qualifier establishes access rights for the directoryC file. Each access code consists of a positional keyword specifyingyC the protection group (SYSTEM:, OWNER:, GROUP:, WORLD:) followed by/6 a 4-code group specifying the protection, as follows:; R - Read, allows the directory to be listed on your screen B W - Write, allows files to be added or removed from the directory= E - Extend, allows the size of the directory to be increasedC/ D - Delete, allows the directory to be deletedC The default is /PROTECTION:(SYS:RWED,OWN:RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R).3 LABELc0 CREATE/DIRECTORY/LABEL:volumelabel [ddnn:][ufd]D The /LABEL qualifier compares the given volume label in the commandE line with the actual label on the volume. If the names match, a UFD R? is allocated. If they do not match, the command is rejected. e" The default is no label checking. 3 NOWARNINGS) CREATE/DIRECTORY/NOWARNINGS [ddnn:][ufd]e5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages. 3 OWNER_UIC( CREATE/DIRECTORY/OWNER_UIC [ddnn:][ufd]B You use this command to specify the UIC of the directory that youA are creating. The default UIC is that of the person issuing them command.t2 CONTROL_FILE_LANGUAGEe#CFL2 CFL @DCLCFLlume. If the names match, a UFD R? is allocated. If they do not match, the command is rejected. e" The default is no label checking. 3 NOWARNINGS) CREATE/DIRECTORY/NOWARNINGS [ddnn:][ufd]e5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages. 3 OWNER_UIC( CREATE/DIRECTORY/ DEALLOCATE[/qualifier] ddnn:d /ALLo /DEVICE  /TERMINAL:ttnn: B The DEALLOCATE command counteracts ALLOCATE. It frees a private  device for access by others.hC The /ALL qualifier frees all devices allocated from your terminal.e2 Do not specify ddnn: when you use this qualifier.C The /DEVICE qualifier is included for the sake of clarity and does not alter the command. F The /TERMINAL qualifier frees devices allocated from other terminals. This qualifier is privileged. Command abbreviation: DEAL /DEVICE  /TERMINAL:ttnn: B The DEALLOCATE command counteracts ALLOCATE. It frees a private  device for access by others.hC The /ALL qualifier frees all devices allocated from your terminal.e2 Do not specify ddnn: when you use this qualifier.C The /DEVICE qualifier is included for the sake of clarity and does not alter the command. F The /TERMINAL qualifier frees devices allocated from other terminals. This qualifie% DEASSIGN[/qualifier[s]] logicalddnn:l /GLOBAL /LOCALo /LOGINa /SYSTEM /TERMINAL:ttnn: or DEASSIGN /ALLE DEASSIGN deletes logical-device assignments. DEASSIGN disassociatesTE logical names, which were given by the ASSIGN command, from physical B device names, pseudo device names, or other logical device names.@ Note that you omit the logical name, ddnn:, when using the /ALL qualifier alone.D For information about the qualifiers, type HELP DEASSIGN qualifier.= For information about deassigning queues to processors, type/ HELP DEASSIGN QUEUE./ T Command abbreviation: DEASr2 ALLA DEASSIGN/ALLA@ The /ALL qualifier deletes all logical name assignments of the > specified type. No logical name is required with this format.G If you use this qualifier alone, /ALL deletes all local assignments. 2 You can use this qualifier with other qualifiers.2 SYSTEM#GLOBALi2 GLOBAL DEASSIGN/GLOBAL logicalddnn:q DEASSIGN/SYSTEM logicalddnn:u@ The /GLOBAL qualifier deletes a global logical name assignment.C A global logical name applies to all tasks running on the system. A9 /SYSTEM is a synonym for /GLOBAL. /TERMINAL can not be a used with this qualifier. This is a privileged qualifier.2 LOCALw DEASSIGN/LOCAL logicalddnn:D The /LOCAL qualifier is the default. This qualifier deletes a localB logical name assignment. A local logical name exists only for the7 terminal at which the /ASSIGN command had been issued.g2 LOGINu DEASSIGN/LOGIN logicalddnn:> The /LOGIN qualifier deletes a login logical name assignment. See HELP ASSIGN LOGIN.n This is a privileged qualifier. 2 TERMINAL% DEASSIGN/TERMINAL:ttnn: logicalddnn:iC The /TERMINAL qualifier deletes the local logical name assignment /E of another terminal. /TERMINAL can not be used along with /GLOBAL ori /SYSTEM. This is a privileged qualifier.2 QUEUEi @DCLDEASSQsts only for the7 terminal at which the /ASSIGN command had been issued.g2 LOGINu DEASSIGN/ ' DEASSIGN/QUEUE queuename processorname E The DEASSIGN/QUEUE command counteracts ASSIGN/QUEUE. It is used to pA eliminate the path between a queue and a processor in the Queue i2 Manager subsystem. This is a privileged command. C By first deleting a path between a queue and a processor and then uB creating a path between that queue and another processor, you canF redirect jobs from one processor to another. See HELP ASSIGN QUEUE.  DEBUG [taskname] F DEBUG forces a task to trap to a debugger by setting the T-bit in theG task's Processor Status Word. The task must have been built using the.? /DEBUG qualifier to the LINK command or have issued the SVDB$ C Executive directive (Specify SST Vector Table for Debugging Aid). lD The taskname in the command line specifies the name of the task youB wish to trap. If you do not specify a taskname, the default is aF task named after the terminal from which the command was issued, such as TT5. a 8 DIGITAL offers two debuggers for use with this command:C o ODT-11, the On-Line Debugging Tool, is available separately as eH part of the Micro/RSX Advanced Programmer's Kit. It can be used on + MACRO-11 code and in-line FORTRAN code. G o Micro/RSX FORTRAN-77 DEBUG is available separately from your sales cK office. FROTRAN-77 DEBUG can be used with FORTRAN-77 code or MACRO-11 a code.aF Nonprivileged users can issue this command for any nonprivileged taskF running from their terminal. Privileged users can name any task, butI the command must be issued from the same terminal the task was run from. 0 See HELP DEBUG EXAMPLE and HELP DEBUG MESSAGE. 2 EXAMPLEc $ RUN JOE  $ SHOW TASKS/ACTIVET MCR... (TT5:) SHOT5 (TT5:)  TT5 (TT5:)f .  .7 .  $ DEBUGo TE:002452  oD In this example, the task was built including ODT. The user issued? the DEBUG command, which defaulted to the task named after theeC terminal. The display from ODT gives the T-bit exception code andeD the address following the location in error and issues its prompt. D The user can then proceed with debugging. ODT available as part of the Advanced Programmer's Kit. A The DEBUG command is useful when a task is caught in an infinite7< loop between breakpoints, or is waiting for an incorrect or nonexistent event flag. @ See the RSX-11M/M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Executive Reference ManualC for information on the SVDB$ directive. This manual is available mB separately or as part of the Micro/RSX Advanced Programmer's Kit.C See the RSX-11M/M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Task Builder Manual for more wH information on the /DEBUG qualifier to LINK. This manual is available B separately or as part of the Micro/RSX Advanced Programmer's Kit. 2 MESSAGEe e7 "time" *** "taskname" does not contain a debugging aidsA Explanation: An attempt was made to debug a task that was not  built with a debugging aid. )User Action: None. This cannot be done.ailable mB separately or as part of the Micro/RSX Advanced Programmer's Kit.C See the RSX-11M/M-PLUS and Micro/RSX Task Builder Manual for more wH information on the /DEBUG qualifier to LINK. This manual is available B separately or as part of the Micro/RSX Advanced Programmer's Kit. 2 MESSAGEe e7 "time" *** "taskname" does not contain a debugging aidsA Explanation: An attempt was made to debug a task that was not " DELETE[/qualifier[s]] filespec[s] /[NO]LOG /NOWARNINGSn /[NO]QUERYt /DATE:dd-mmm-yyL /SINCE:dd-mmm-yyL /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy* /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAY /EXCLUDE:filespec.C The DELETE command deletes specified versions of files from a userRD directory and releases the storage space the files occupy. You mustC supply the name, type, and version number of the files you wish toeA delete. (You do not need to supply a file type if the file has aLC null type.) Device and UFD fields of the filespec default to yourNC current device and UFD. You can use wildcards in any field except- the device field. E? For more information on the above qualifiers, type HELP DELETE. qualifier.LD You can also delete jobs or entries from queues, delete queues, or E delete processors. Type HELP DELETE JOB for information on deleting E jobs or entries. Type HELP DELETE QUEUE for information on deleting  processors or queues.2 ENTRYf#JOB2 JOB @DCLDELJ 2 PROCESSORe#QUEUE2 QUEUEf@DCLDELQ2 NOLOGl#LOG2 LOGc DELETE/LOG filespec[s] H The /LOG qualifier lists on your terminal the names of the files being deleted.n 2 NOQUERYq#QUERY 2 SELECTIVED#QUERY2 QUERYr DELETE/QUERY filespec[s]bE The /QUERY qualifier allows you to selectively delete files. You areED prompted with the name of each file specified in the command line.  The responses are: Y, N, Q, G.n Y - delete the file N - save the file Q - save the file and quit $ G - delete all remaining candidatesB If you respond Y or N, the next possible file is listed. A CTRL/ZF terminates the command when you want to exit before all the specified files have been listed.E DELETE/NOQUERY is usually the default. However, DELETE/QUERY is thel? default when you do not supply a version number for the DELETE command. 2 DATE" DELETE/DATE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]7 Deletes all specified files created on the given date.) Example: $ DELETE/DATE:12-JAN-84 *.MAC;*i. Deletes all .MAC files created on that date. e2 SINCEr# DELETE/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s] @ Deletes all specified files created on or after the given date.C /SINCE can be combined with /THROUGH to delete all specified fileseB that you created within the range of dates. See also HELP DELETE THROUGH.  Examples: e $ DELETE/SINCE:04-AUG-83 *.*;* 8 Deletes all files created on or after the given date.3 $ DELETE/SINCE:04-AUG-83/THROUGH:12-JAN-84 *.TXT;*T1 Deletes all *.TXT files included in date range.t2 THRU#THROUGH 2 THROUGH D% DELETE/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]DA Deletes all specified files created on or before the given date.CC /THROUGH can be combined with /SINCE to delete all specified files B that you created within the range of dates. See also HELP DELETE SINCE. Examples:% $ DELETE/THROUGH:08-MAY-83 REGIS.*;*D4 Deletes all files named REGIS created on or before the given date./3 $ DELETE/SINCE:09-SEP-81/THROUGH:09-OCT-81 *.TXT;* 7 Deletes all .TXT files created within the date range.D2 TODAYH DELETE/TODAY filespec[s]9 Deletes all specified files created on the current date. ! Example: $ DELETE/TODAY MORK.*;*h+ Deletes all files named RAT created today.o 2 EXCLUDEh$ DELETE/EXCLUDE:filespec filespec[s]F Deletes all specified files except the file(s) named in the argument to EXCLUDE.( Example: $ DELETE/EXCLUDE:*.OBJ RAY.*;*, Deletes all files named RAY except RAY.OBJ. 2 NOWARNINGS DELETE/NOWARNINGS filespec[s] Suppresses error messages.e range.D2 TODAYH DELETE/TODAY filespec[s]9 Deletes all specified files created on the current date. ! Example: $ DELETE/TODAY MORK.*;*h+ Deletes all files named RAT created today.o 2 EXCLUDEh$ DELETE/EXCLUDE:filespec filespec[s]F Deletes all specified files except the file(s) named in the argument to EXCLUDE.( Example: $ DELETE/EXCLUDE:*.OBJ RAY.*;*, Deletes all files named RAY except RAY.OBJ. b6 DELETE/JOB[/FILE_POSITION:n] queuename [[uic]]jobname! DELETE/ENTRY:n[/FILE_POSITION:n]e mE The DELETE/JOB and DELETE/ENTRY commands delete either a job from a .+ print or batch queue or a file from a job.  WA A single file in a job can be deleted using the /FILE_POSITION:nE qualifier of the DELETE/JOB command. The argument to this qualifieriE is the number which appears in the SHOW QUEUE display to the left of. the file you want to delete.  B The DELETE/ENTRY:n form of this command is recommended because itF unambiguously refers to a specific job by its entry number, n. Two orB more jobs in the same queue may have the same name, but they willC never have the same entry number. Job entry numbers are displayedi with the SHOW QUEUE command.  e+ For more information see HELP SHOW QUEUE. J c= See HELP DELETE QUEUE for information about deleting queues.aears in the SHOW QUEUE display to the left of. the file you want to delete.  B The DELETE/ENTRY:n form of this command t DELETE/QUEUE queuename/ERASEr# DELETE/processortype processornameo APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR BATCH_PROCESSORo CARD_READERp DEVICE INPUT PRINTERs PROCESSOR  rF The DELETE/QUEUE command deletes a queue by name. The default queuesD of BATCH and PRINT cannot be deleted. The /ERASE qualifier must be specified. F If the queue is not empty when this command is issued, the queue is D marked for deletion. Although a queue that is marked for deletion F cannot accept any more jobs, it sends the jobs remaining in the queue< to processors. When the queue empties, it is then deleted.  I The DELETE/processortype command deletes a print, batch, card reader, or applications processor. e: Only a privileged user can delete a queue or a processor. aE See HELP DELETE JOB for information about deleting jobs from queues. queue is not empty when this command is issued, the queue is D marked for deletion. Although a queue that is F DIRECTORY[/format-qual][/destination-qual][/other-qual] [filespec[s]]; /ATTRIBUTES /OUTPUT[:filespec] /DATE:dd-mmm-yy< /BRIEF /PRINTER /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy> /FREE [ddnn:] /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy2 /FULL /TODAY= /NOWARNINGS /EXCLUDE:filespecn+ /REWIND f+ /SUMMARY s> The DIRECTORY command displays information about file(s) in aE directory. By default, this command lists the following information TD for each file: the full filespec, the number of blocks used by theE file, and the creation date of the file. At the end of this listing A is a summary of the number of files and the space that they use. C Format qualifiers control the type of information in the directorynE listing. Destination qualifiers control where the command output is C sent. Other qualifiers list directory files according to the dateb7 created or what you want to exclude from the listing. sF If you do not supply a filespec, a complete directory for your UFD isE displayed. However, this optional filespec allows you to specify a tD particular subset of your directory. You can also obtain a listing> of another directory by supplying the appropriate UFD in the filespec. nH For information on the above qualifiers, type HELP DIRECTORY qualifier. Command abbreviation: D 2 ATTRIBUTES# DIRECTORY/ATTRIBUTES [filespec[s]]tB The /ATTRIBUTES qualifier displays the Record Management ServicesC (RMS-11) attributes of the specified file(s). These attributes aresG displayed for all files specified in the DIRECTORY command, regardlessiE of whether the file is an RMS-11 file. The information included int this format is: p full file namea file organization creation date and timei revision date and times file protection record format record attributes file attributes the allocation quantity the default extend quantity' maximum record number (relative files)g) bucket size (relative and indexed files) 6 primary and alternate key definitions (indexed files)2 FULL DIRECTORY/FULL [filespec[s]]mH The /FULL qualifier specifies that you want full information listed in F the directory. Full format includes the name, type, and version num-H ber, the file-ID number (in the format filenumber, filesequencenumber),C the number of blocks used/allocated, code C for contiguous files, uE code L for locked files, creation date and time, protection status, f; date and time of last update, and the number of revisions.a2 BRIEFa DIRECTORY/BRIEF [filespec[s]]G The /BRIEF qualifier specifies that the directory listing only contains4 the names, types, and version numbers of the files.2 FREE DIRECTORY/FREE [ddnn:]eE The /FREE qualifier displays the amount of free space on the defaultbE device or the specified device. This display includes the amount offF space used, the largest remaining amount of contiguous space, and the number of free file headers. 2 OUTPUT( DIRECTORY/OUTPUT:filespec [filespec[s]]E The /OUTPUT qualifier directs the output of the directory listing tofA the file specified in the filespec argument, rather than to yourd terminal. e 2 PRINTERi DIRECTORY/PRINTER [filespec[s]]F The /PRINTER qualifier directs the output of the directory listing toD LP0:. Generally, it is better to direct the output to a file using< the /OUTPUT qualifier and then to print that file with the E PRINT/DELETE command. In this way, your output can be directed to aY specific printer. e 2 SUMMARYT DIRECTORY/SUMMARY [filespec[s]]F The /SUMMARY qualifier displays the total number of blocks allocated F and used for the specified files. If you do not specify a filespec, E this qualifier displys the information for all files in the default i directory.n2 DATE' DIRECTORY/DATE:dd-mmm-yy [filespec[s]] ; The /DATE qualifier lists files created on the given date.t2 SINCEw( DIRECTORY/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy [filespec[s]]E The /SINCE qualifier lists files created on or after the given date.C You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to list files created within at" range of dates. This format is: > DIRECTORY/SINCE:dd-mm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mm-yy [filespec[s]] 2 THROUGHi* DIRECTORY/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy [filespec[s]]H The /THROUGH qualifier lists files created on or before the given date.C You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to list files created within ae" range of dates. This format is: > DIRECTORY/SINCE:dd-mm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mm-yy [filespec[s]] 2 TODAYf DIRECTORY/TODAY [filespec[s]]0 The /TODAY qualifier lists files created today. 2 EXCLUDEe) DIRECTORY/EXCLUDE:filespec [filespec[s]]RD The /EXCLUDE qualifer lists all files except the file named in the A filespec argument. You can exclude more than one file from the C directory listing by using wildcards (*) in the filespec argument.G 2 NOWARNINGS# DIRECTORY/NOWARNINGS [filespec[s]]o5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages.-2 REWIND DIRECTORY/REWIND [filespec[s]]? The /REWIND qualifier applies only to magtape. This qualifiere. rewinds the tape before the command executes.LUDE:filespec [filespec[s]]RD The /EXCLUDE qualifer lists all files except the file named in the A filespec argument. You can exclude more than one file from the C directory listing by using wildcards (*) in the filespec argument.G 2 NOWARNINGS# DIRECTORY/NOWARNINGS [filespe, DISMOUNT[/qualifier[s]] ddnn: [volumelabel] /ALL /PUBLIC /SAVE /SYSTEM /TERMINAL:ttnn: /[NO]UNLOADE The DISMOUNT command marks the volume mounted on ddnn: as logically 0 off line and disconnected from the file system.I The volumelabel argument is optional. If you specify a volume label, it r, is checked against the label of the volume.2 SYSTEM#PUBLICd2 DEVICE#PUBLICT2 PUBLIC$ DISMOUNT/SYSTEM ddnn: [volumelabel]$ DISMOUNT/PUBLIC ddnn: [volumelabel]E The /SYSTEM qualifier dismounts all users from a volume, regardless A of who had mounted the volume. /PUBLIC is a synomyn for /SYSTEM.C Only a privileged user may use the /SYSTEM and /PUBLIC qualifiers. 2 NOUNLOAD#UNLOADe2 SAVE" DISMOUNT/SAVE ddnn: [volumelabel]G The /SAVE qualifier specifies that the volume is to remain spinning iniA the drive, to be accessed for either read or write by privilegedT tasks.C5 Only a privileged user may use the /SAVE qualifier. d2 UNLOAD( DISMOUNT/[NO]UNLOAD ddnn: [volumelabel]E The /UNLOAD and /NOUNLOAD qualifers apply to DB:, DM:, and DU: disksP and magnetic tapes only. B The /UNLOAD qualifier specifies that the disk should be spun downF after the dismount. This is the default for mounted Files-11 volumes.C For magnetic tapes, this qualifer allows the tape to be completelyn rewound.tH Only a privileged user can spin down the removable unit of a multiunit ! device (for example, the RC25). h= The /NOUNLOAD qualifier specifies that the disk is to remainuF spinning after the dismount. This is the default for mounted foreign E volumes. For magnetic tapes, this qualifier rewinds the tape to thei first file position. 2 TERMINAL, DISMOUNT/TERMINAL:ttnn: ddnn: [volumelabel]A The /TERMINAL qualifier dismounts a volume from a terminal otherh6 than the terminal from which the volume was mounted. : Only a privileged user may use the /TERMINAL qualifier. 2 USER#ALL2 ALLC DISMOUNT/ALL/D The /ALL qualifier dismounts all volumes you have mounted from the  current terminal. is the default for mounted foreign E volumes. For magnetic tapes, this qualifier rewinds the tape to thei first file position. 2 TERMINAL, DISMOUNT/TERMINAL:ttnn: ddnn: [volumelabel]A The /TERMINAL qualifier dismounts a volume from a terminal otherh6 than the terminal from which the volume was mounted. : Only a privileged user may use the /TERMINAL qualifier. 2 USER#ALL2 ALLC DISMOUNT/ALL/D The /ALL qualifier # EDIT[/EDT][/qualifier[s]] filespeco% /[NO]COMMAND[:filespec] t% /[NO]JOURNAL[:filespec] N" /[NO]OUTPUT[:filespec] /[NO]READ_ONLY /[NO]RECOVER; The EDIT command invokes EDT, the DIGITAL standard editor.eA EDT has its own HELP files, which you can access from within EDTd using the EDT HELP command.F The /COMMAND qualifier names a file of EDT initialization commands. G This file contains commands that alter the default setup for EDT. The IE default is /COMMAND:EDTINI.EDT. If you have an EDTINI.EDT file and t5 do not wish to use it, use the /NOCOMMAND qualifier.[D The /JOURNAL qualifier controls whether EDT creates a journal file D for the editing session. The journal file consists of all editing F commands and text entered during the session. If the editing sessionC ends abnormally, the journal file is saved. You can then use the ? /RECOVER qualifier to recreate the lost text. The default is eE /JOURNAL:infilespec. If you specify /NOJOURNAL, no journal file is f& created, and no recovery is possible.G The /OUTPUT qualifier is used to give an output file a name different eF from the input file. The default is to create an output file of the E same name and type as the input file, with a version number that is dG one higher. If you specify /NOOUTPUT, an output file is not created. aE When using /NOOUTPUT, you cannot EXIT from EDT unless you include a t! filespec after the EXIT command.D The /READ_ONLY qualifier opens the file for reading only. You can E use /READ_ONLY to look at files to which you have no write access. d The default is /NOREAD_ONLY.dK The /RECOVER qualifier reads editing commands from a journal file prior tohG starting an editing session. With this command, you can recover text dK lost from your previous editing session if it was interrupted by a system W4 crash or other problem. The default is /NORECOVER. Abbreviation: Esc after the EXIT command.D The /READ_ONLY qual FIX[/qualifier] tasknameF /READONLY_SEGMENT /REGIONE The FIX command causes an installed task or region to be loaded and YG locked into memory. Subsequent requests for the task or region may be aG serviced more quickly because it is memory-resident and does not have  to be loaded from the disk.= Not all tasks run properly when fixed. Some tasks may expectwC data areas to contain certain values when loaded in from disk. TheiE first time the task is run, these data areas may be modified and thefB task may run unexpectedly thereafter. Tasks that initialize their? data areas, and therefore do not have this problem, are callede serially re-entrant.nE Overlaid tasks may be fixed and, if their root segments are seriallyeG re-entrant, will run correctly. However, since their overlaid segmentsA must still be read in from disk (unless the task was built usingdE memory resident overlays), not much is gained by using this command.r0 Only a privileged user may use the FIX command.E For more information on the FIX qualifiers, type HELP FIX qualifier.i2 READONLY_SEGMENT FIX/READONLY_SEGMENT tasknameF The /READONLY qualifier allows the fixing of the read-only segment of a multi-user task. 2 REGION FIX/REGION regionname> The /REGION qualifier allows the fixing of a common region. t still be read in from disk (unless the task was built usingdE memory resident overlays), not much is gained by using this command.r0 Only a privileged user may use the FIX comman5 HELP[/qualifier[s]] [%] [parameter1 ... parameter9]f /OUTPUT:filespec /LOCAL /GROUPr /CLI:clinamen /DCL, /FILE:filespecl /filenameC Type HELP and HELP MORE for information on available HELP. You cantF also access HELP by typing a ? in response to any DCL prompt, and you; can type ? topic to receive HELP on a particular subject. HE For information on the above qualifiers, type HELP HELP qualifier. n Abbreviation: H2 OUTPUT$ HELP/OUTPUT:filespec [parameter[s]]E Permits you to name an output file where the requested HELP text is ; saved. The default is to send HELP text to your terminal.E2 LOCALl HELP/LOCAL [parameter[s]] ora HELP % [parameter[s]]D Specifies that the HELP text is in the file HELP.HLP in the defaultH directory on the default volume. HELP/LOCAL and HELP % are equivalent.2 GROUP  HELP/GROUP [parameter[s]] nF Specifies that the HELP text is in the file HELP.HLP in the directory6 [g,1] on the default volume (g is your group number).2 FILE" HELP/FILE:filespec [parameter[s]]? Specifies a file containing HELP text. If you do not give aoB complete file specification, the default is LB:[1,2]filename.HLP. 2 FILENAME HELP/filename [parameter[s]]t J Specifies that the HELP text is located in the file LB:[1,2]filename.HLP,1 where filename is a 1- to 9-character file name.L2 CLIp HELP/CLI:cliname [parameter[s]] G This qualifier retrieves HELP text when your command line interpreter 3 (CLI) is other than DCL (Digital Comand Language).f2 DCLp HELP/DCL [parameter[s]]D If the command line interpreter of your terminal is not set to DCL,F you specify this qualifier to get DCL HELP text. If your command lineB interpreter is DCL, this qualifier is the default and need not be specified. See HELP CLI. me.HLP,1 where filename is a 1- to 9-character file name.L2 CLIp HELP/CLI:cliname [parameter[s]] G This qualifier retrieves HELP text when your command line interpret y HOLD/JOB queuename [uic]jobname HOLD/ENTRY:n  m< The HOLD/JOB and HOLD/ENTRY commands hold a job in a queue.? A job that is held is not eligible to be processed until it isl explicitly released.E mG You might hold a job so that you could make some preparation necessaryEF to the successful execution of that job. You might also hold a job so% that you can run it at a later time. TH The HOLD/ENTRY:n form of this command is recommended because it is the H only way to unambiguously refer to a specific job. Two or more jobs in K the same queue may have the same name, but will never have the same entry uI number. Job entry numbers are displayed with the SHOW QUEUE command. i l* For more information see HELP SHOW QUEUE.  See also HELP RELEASE.ration necessaryEF to the successful execution of that job. You might also hold a job so% that you can run it at a later time. TH The HOLD/ENTRY:n form of this command is recommended because it is the H only way to unambiguously refer- INITIALIZE[/qualifier[s]] ddnn: volumelabel H /ACCESSED:n /FILE_PROTECTION:(code); /BAD_BLOCKS:arg /HEADERS:nS; AUTOMATIC /INDEX:argiA BAD_TRACK BEGINNINGt> MANUAL MIDDLE; OVERRIDE ENDg9 (AUTOMATIC,MANUAL) nn* (BAD_TRACK,MANUAL)I /DENSITY:arg /LABEL:VOLUME_ACCESSIBILITY:"c"OA 800 /MAXIMUM_FILES:nE/ 1600 /OWNER:[uic] > 6250 /PROFESSIONALC /EXTENSION:n /PROTECTION:(code) : /[NO]SHOW; /WINDOWS:nAG The INITIALIZE command sets up a volume in Files-11 format. For more TG information on a given qualifier, see HELP INITIALIZE qualifier. Note E that you must mount the volume using the /FOREIGN qualifier for the MOUNT command. See HELP MOUNT.C For information on INITIALIZE/UPDATE, type HELP INITIALIZE UPDATE. A Privileged users can initialize queues and processors. See HELP 0 INITIALIZE PROCESSOR and HELP INITIALIZE QUEUE.2 UPDATE3 INITIALIZE/UPDATE[/qualifier[s]] ddnn: volumelabel: /ACCESSED:n /DENSITY:arg. 800i 1600 6250 /EXTENSION:nI* /FILE_PROTECTION:(code)# /MAXIMUM_FILES:nN /OWNER:[uic]L% /PROTECTION:(code)t /[NO]SHOW( /LABEL:newvolumelabel /WINDOWS:nIA The INITIALIZE command creates a Volume Home Block that includes @ a number of values used by the ACP when the volume is mounted. ? INITIALIZE/UPDATE uses the HOME utility to alter some of those E values without affecting the other data on the volume. This command/: is only for disk and DECtape volumes in Files-11 format. B For information on a qiven qualifier, type HELP INITIALIZE UPDATE qualifier. 3 ACCESSED:n INITIALIZE/UPDATE/ACCESSED:n > The /ACCESSED:n qualifier specifies the approximate number ofC directories that will be accessed simultaneously during the mount.e. Legal values for n range from 1 through 127. A Note that increasing the /ACCESSED value increases the amount ofl system pool used. 3 DENSITY  INITIALIZE/UPDATE/DENSITY:arg 800 1600F 6500e; Alters the /DENSITY value established when the volume was I initialized. , For more help, type HELP INITIALIZE DENSITY 3 EXTENSIONo INITIALIZE/UPDATE/EXTENSION:n@ Specifies the number of blocks by which a file will be extended> if it has exhausted its space allocation. Valid values for n range from 1 through 127. " Default is set by system manager.3 FILE_PROTECTIONA) INITIALIZE/UPDATE/FILE_PROTECTION:(code)8D The /FILE_PROTECTION qualifier specifies the default protection for? new files created on a volume. Each access code consists of aiB positional keyword specifying the group (SYSTEM:, OWNER:, GROUP:,B WORLD:) followed by a 4-letter code specifying the protection, as follows: R - allow read access to volume! W - allow write access to volume." E - allow extend access to volume" D - allow delete access to volume5 See the Micro/RSX User's Guide for more information.E3 OWNERT INITIALIZE/UPDATE/OWNER:[uic]% Specifies the owner of the volume. t5 See the Micro/RSX User's Guide for more information.c3 MAXIMUM_FILESi" INITIALIZE/UPDATE/MAXIMUM_FILES:n? Specifies the maximum number of files permitted on the volume.e= This value must not be greater than the maximum value on thec current volume. 3 PROTECTION s$ INITIALIZE/UPDATE/PROTECTION:(code)0 Specifies the volume protection for the volume.3 NOSHOW#SHOWU3 SHOW INITIALIZE/UPDATE/[NO]SHOWW; Specifies that the information about the volume whose homeo< block is being updated is to be displayed on your terminal. /NOSHOW is the default.3 LABELI L' INITIALIZE/UPDATE/LABEL:newvolumelabelt; Permits you to change the volume label. Volume labels canu" contain as many as 12 characters. 3 WINDOWS  INITIALIZE/UPDATE/WINDOWS:nA Specifies the default number of mapping pointers to be allocatedl< for file windows when the file is accessed. A file window ? consists of a number of mapping pointers stored in memory whenu the file is opened.- Legal values for n range from 1 through 127. 3 PROFESSIONAL1 INITIALIZE/UPDATE/PROFESSIONAL ddnn: volumelabelZB The /PROFESSIONAL qualifier alters the values in the Volume Home ) Block in a Professional 300 Series disk.a2 INPUTa #CARD_READER2 DEVICE #PROCESSOR 2 PRINTERS #PROCESSOR2 BATCH_PROCESSORm #PROCESSOR2 APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR #PROCESSOR 2 PROCESSORn e6 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname[/qualifier[s]]" APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR DEVICE e BATCH_PROCESSOR  PRINTER  PROCESSOR L /J The INITIALIZE/processortype command initializes a processor and makes itB known to the queue manager. This is generally done in the system startup command file. EN Note that /DEVICE and /PRINTER are synonyms for initializing processors whichG are associated with some hardware device such as a printer or plotter.rL This is the default processor type. Use /BATCH_PROCESSOR for initializing K batch processors. Use /APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR when your output device is < not a physical device but rather some software application. mE The following qualifiers are available. For more information on the @ following qualifiers, type HELP INITIALIZE PROCESSOR qualifier. t1 /FLAG_PAGE /FORMS /LOWERCASEl# /UPPERCASE /[NO]SHAREABLEe4 See HELP INITIALIZE CARD_READER for information on initializing input processors. 3 FLAG_PAGEB H3 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/FLAG_PAGE:n  DEVICE PRINTERd cE The /FLAG_PAGE qualifier specifies how many, if any, job flag pages mE and file flag pages are to be generated for a print job. These flag ? pages separate and identify jobs and files within those jobs. . t# Valid values for n are 0, 1, or 2.  /# The default value is /FLAG_PAGE:1.] RA It is recommended that flag pages be used on normal output formsi> as they are the only way to separate and identify print jobs. oI It is recommended that flag pages NOT be used on special forms, such as L checks, as they will write over some of these (possibly prenumbered) forms. fB This qualifier is only valid when initializing a print processor.3 FORMSr / INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/FORMS:n DEVICE PRINTERM The /FORMS qualifier specifies the physical form type for the printer being bJ initialized. An installation may have up to 256 different physical forms M used for different jobs. For example, one might have normal 11 1/2 x 14 7/8 aO paper for reports and general output, along with special forms for paychecks, uL invoices, federal tax forms, etc. Each of these forms is given a number to B identify it. For information on setting up special forms, see the" Micro/RSX System Manager's Guide. RK The Queue Manager will only dequeue a job to a printer if the form number tK of the form in the printer matches the form number requested by the print aJ job. Therefore, many jobs using a variety of forms may reside in a queue L at the same time but only those with a certain form number will be printed 0 on the printer to which that queue is assigned. 3 LOWERCASEe #UPPERCASE 3 UPPERCASEr 5 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/[NO]LOWERCASEo5 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/[NO]UPPERCASET DEVICE PRINTERtC Either the /LOWERCASE or /NOUPPERCASE qualifier specifies that theh> device being initialized has the lower case character option.B /NOLOWERCASE and /UPPERCASE initialize a device to the upper caseD character option. These qualifiers limit which jobs may be dequeuedC to the specified device. They do not cause a translation of lower 7 case characters to uppercase when the job is printed. N OC The defaults are /LOWERCASE and /NOUPPERCASE, which are the same. 3 NOSHAREABLE #SHAREABLE 3 SHAREABLEE e5 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname/[NO]SHAREABLEa DEVICE PRINTER D The /[NO]SHAREABLE qualifier specifies whether tasks other than the? device processor have access to the device being spooled. If iE /SHAREABLE is specified, the processor owns the device only for the uE duration of a job. If no job is currently being printed, the devicei) is available for any other task to use. A a@ If /NOSHAREABLE is specified, the device is always owned by theH processor, whether or not a job is being printed. This is the default. 2 CARD_READERI6 INITIALIZE/processortype processorname[/qualifier[s]]1 CARD_READER /BATCH_QUEUE:queuenamer- INPUT /PRINTER_QUEUE:queuename. /CONSOLE:ddnn: e; The INITIALIZE/CARD_READER command initializes a processoroE associated with a card reader device. This is referred to as "inputi0 spooling." INPUT is a synonym for CARD_READER. BI The /BATCH_QUEUE and /PRINTER_QUEUE qualifiers specify default batch andnI print queues for jobs read from the card reader. The defaults for theseL9 qualifiers are the queues BATCH and PRINT, respectively.E RJ The /CONSOLE qualifier specifies which terminal will be used for messagesG that are displayed by the card reader processor. The default is CO0:.t2 QUEUE  c' INITIALIZE/QUEUE queuename[/qualifier]v /PRINTERe /BATCHu /NOWARNINGS  N The INITIALIZE/QUEUE command creates a queue. This is generally done in the  system startup command file.  G The /PRINTER and /BATCH qualifiers to the queuename identify the type E of queue being initialized. The /PRINTER qualifier is the default.  cH The /NOWARNINGS qualifier inhibits error messages. The user gets error messages by default. 2 DENSITYi) INITIALIZE/DENSITY:arg ddnn: volumelabelu 800 R 1600 6250A The /DENSITY qualifier specifies the density at which a magnetic D tape is to be written. In the case of a floppy disk, it checks thatE the disk was formatted at the requested density. Note that this is  not true for RX50 floppettes.F The default value is the lower of the two densities on a dual densityF drive. On single density drives, the qualifier serves as a check that- the drive operates at the requested density.e? NOTE: The /DENSITY qualifier is the only legal qualifier when # initializing magnetic tapes.c 2 EXTENSIONs) INITIALIZE/EXTENSION:n ddnn: volumelabeltC The /EXTENSION qualifier specifies the default number of blocks byeH which a file will be extended when it has exhausted its allotted space.# The default value is /EXTENSION:5.e 2 HEADERSo' INITIALIZE/HEADERS:n ddnn: volumelabeln? The /HEADERS qualifier specifies the number of file headers toe@ be allocated initially in the index file. The five system files> INDEXF.SYS, BITMAP.SYS, BADBLK.SYS, CORIMG.SYS and 000000.DIR% are not included in the value for n.Z2 INDEXO' INITIALIZE/INDEX:arg ddnn: volumelabelu BEGINNINGe MIDDLE ENDo ns= The /INDEX qualifier specifies where on the volume the indexl> file is to be placed. This qualifier can be used to force theB index file, the Master File Directory, and the storage allocation= file to a specific location on the disk, usually to minimizet access time.d6 The default is /INDEX:MIDDLE for all disk devices and0 /INDEX:BEGINNING for all magnetic tape devices.2 MAXIMUM_FILESe- INITIALIZE/MAXIMUM_FILES:n ddnn: volumelabel C The /MAXIMUM_FILES qualifier specifies the maximum number of filesEI permitted on the volume. The value for n includes the five system files.. The minimum value for n is 5.2 OWNER) INITIALIZE/OWNER:[uic] ddnn: volumelabelh= The /OWNER qualifier specifies the owning uic of the volume.a) The square brackets are required syntax.f# The default value is /OWNER:[1,1].c? Micro/RSX does not protect a volume at the UIC level. It does,_C however, prevent direct access to mounted volumes by nonprivilegedI tasks. 2 PROTECTION/ INITIALIZE/PROTECTION:(code) ddnn: volumelabelhC The /PROTECTION qualifier specifies the default protection for allm@ files created on the volume being initialized. Each access codeA consists of a positional keyword specifying the protection group G (SYSTEM:, OWNER:, GROUP:, WORLD:) folowed by a 4-code group specifyinge the protection, as follows: R - allow read access to file W - allow write access to file  E - allow file to be extended D - allow file to be deleteds@ The default value is /PROTECTION:(S:RWED,O:RWED,G:RWED,W:RWED).2 NOSHOW#SHOWC2 SHOW& INITIALIZE/[NO]SHOW ddnn: volumelabel B The /SHOW qualifier specifies that you wish to see all the valuesE with which the volume is being initialized. /NOSHOW is the default. These are the DCL values: ) Labelo /BAD_BLOCKSt /EXTENSION /FILE_PROTECTION /INDEX /HEADERS /ACCESSEDl /MAXIMUM_FILES /PROTECTION /OWNER /WINDOWS G 2 BAD_BLOCKS INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:arg I! AUTOMATICl! BAD_TRACKs MANUAL OVERRIDE* (AUTOMATIC,MANUAL)* (BAD_TRACK,MANUAL)F INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS uses the bad-block information generated by theD ANALYZE/MEDIA command to create the BADBLK.SYS file in the Files-11K structure. Type HELP INITIALIZE BAD_BLOCKS qualifier for more information.WE Note that, before you can use INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS, you must first E determine the location of the bad blocks by using the ANALYZE/MEDIA " command. See HELP ANALYZE MEDIA. 3 AUTOMATICR INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:AUTOMATICB Specifies that bad-block information for the volume is determinedD automatically from a file named BADBLK.SYS, which is created by the. ANALYZE/MEDIA command. This is the default. 3 BAD_TRACK1! INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:BAD_TRACK BD Specifies that the BADBLK.SYS file should include the last track onD the disk, which contains manufacturer-recorded bad block data. ThisD qualifier assumes that BADBLK.SYS is located on the last good blockC before the last track. BAD_TRACK is valid only for DL:-, DM:-, ande DR:-type devices. 3 MANUAL INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:MANUALE Specifies that bad-block information for the volume is to be enteredA by you from your terminal. 3 OVERRIDE INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:OVERRIDE D Specifies that bad-block information generated by the ANALYZE/MEDIAD command should be ignored. All blocks on the disk, therefore, are accepted by the system as good.3 (AUTOMATIC,MANUAL)#AUTOMATIC,MANUAL 3 AUTOMATIC,MANUAL* INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:(AUTOMATIC,MANUAL) B First reads bad-block information for the volume from BADBLK.SYS,F and then allows additional bad-block information to be entered by you from your terminal. r3 (BAD_TRACK,MANUAL)#BAD_TRACK,MANUALZ3 BAD_TRACK,MANUAL* INITIALIZE/BAD_BLOCKS:(BAD_TRACK,MANUAL) D Specifies that the BADBLK.SYS file should include the last track onE the disk, which contains manufacturer-recorded bad block data. (ThisMD qualifier assumes that BADBLK.SYS is located on the last good blockG before the last track.) In addition, this qualifier allows additionalv? bad-block information to be entered by you from your terminal.oH (BAD_TRACK,MANUAL) is valid only for DL:-, DM:-, and DR:-type devices. 2 FILE_PROTECTIONZ4 INITIALIZE/FILE_PROTECTION:(code) ddnn: volumelabelE The /FILE_PROTECTION qualifier specifies the default protection for E files on a volume. Each access code consists of a positional keywordaE specifying the group (SYSTEM:, OWNER:, GROUP:, WORLD:) followed by ad6 4-letter code specifying the protection, as follows: R - allow read access to volume! W - allow write access to volumer" E - allow extend access to volume" D - allow delete access to volumeE The default value is /FILE_PROTECTION:(S:RWED,O:RWED,G:RWED,W:RWED).d? Micro/RSX does not protect a volume at the UIC level. It does,hC however, prevent direct access to mounted volumes by nonprivilegedi tasks.p 2 WINDOWSe' INITIALIZE/WINDOWS:n ddnn: volumelabelWF The /WINDOWS qualifier specifies the number of mapping pointers to beB allocated for file windows. A file window consists of a number ofB mapping pointers; it is stored in memory when the file is opened.! The default value is /WINDOWS:7.f 2 ACCESSED INITIALIZE/ACCESSED:nI This qualifier specifies the number of directories that will be accessedeF simultaneously. Directory operations can be speeded up by increasing8 the /ACCESSED count, but at the potential cost of pool. nF The default for n is 3. Legal values for n range from 0 through 127.2 PROFESSIONAL* INITIALIZE/PROFESSIONAL ddnn: volumelabel: This qualifier sets up a volume in Files-11 format for a  Professional 300 Series disk.2 LABELt* INITIALIZE/LABEL:VOLUME_ACCESSIBILITY:"c"B This qualifier limits access to the Files-11 volume that you are G producing. It applies to magnetic tapes only. The value for "c" can p3 be A-2, 0-9, and ! % ' () + , - . / : <=> ? or ; t The default value is a blank.he default for n is 3. Legal values for n range from 0 through 127.2 PROFESSIONAL* INITIALIZE/PROFESSIONAL ddnn: volumelabel: This qualifier sets up a volume in Files-11 format for a  Professional 300 Seri# INSTALL[/qualifier[s]] [$]filespec  /[NO]CHECKPOINTe /COMMAND:"taskcommand" /EXTENSION:n /[NO]INTERPRETERl /MULTIUSER_PARTITION:parname /PARTITION:parname /[NO]POSTMORTEMa /PRIORITY:n  /[NO]READONLY_COMMON /[NO]RESIDENT_HEADERc /[NO]SLAVE /TASK_NAME:taskreferencename /UIC:[uic]C The INSTALL command includes a task in the System Task Directory, C thus making it known to the system. An installed task is dormant sI until the Executive receive a request for it to run. Only a privileged # user may issue an INSTALL command.o3 For more information, type HELP INSTALL qualifier.M2 NOCHECKPOINT #CHECKPOINT 2 CHECKPOINT# INSTALL/[NO]CHECKPOINT [$]filespec F The /[NO]CHECKPOINT qualifier specifies whether or not the task is toD be checkpointable. The default is set at link time. This qualifier 3 overrides the link-time checkpoint specification. a 2 COMMANDw* INSTALL/COMMAND:"taskcommand" [$]filespecG The /COMMAND qualifier permits you to pass a command to a task at the dC same time you install it. The command must be enclosed in quotes p, and recognized by the task being installed.2 DUMP #POSTMORTEMI2 NOPOSTMORTEM #POSTMORTEM 2 POSTMORTEM# INSTALL/[NO]POSTMORTEM [$]filespeciE The /POSTMORTEM qualifier specifies whether or not a Postmortem DumptD (PMD) is to be generated if the task aborts because of an SST error; condition. The default is set at link time. This qualifier[< overrides the link-time specification. See also HELP PMD. 2 EXTENSIONs INSTALL/EXTENSION:n [$]filespecN The /EXTENSION qualifier specifies that n (octal) additional words of address% space are to be allocated to a task.T2 MULTIUSER_PARTITION  T0 INSTALL/MULTIUSER_PARTITION:parname [$]filespec /F The /MULTIUSER_PARTITION qualifier specifies the partition into which> the read-only portion of a multiuser task is to be installed. 2 PARTITIONh& INSTALL/PARTITION:parname [$]filespecD The /PARTITION qualifier specifies in what partition the task is toD be installed. The default is set at link time. This qualifier over-# rides the link-time specification.a 2 PRIORITY INSTALL/PRIORITY:n [$]filespectG The /PRIORITY qualifier specifies the priority at which the task is toeI run. The value for n is from 0 through 250. The default is set at link o< time. This qualifier overrides the link-time specification.2 NOREADONLY_COMMONT#READONLY_COMMON2 READONLY_COMMON[ i( INSTALL/[NO]READONLY_COMMON [$]filespec @ The /READONLY_COMMON qualifier specifies that the common being > installed should only have read-only access. The default is  /NOREADONLY_COMMON. 2 NOSLAVEL#SLAVE2 SLAVEl INSTALL/[NO]SLAVE [$]filespecH The /SLAVE qualifier specifies whether or not the task is to be slaved.G Data sent to a slaved task is marked with the TI: of the sending task.rF When the installed task receives the data, the system sets the task'sG TI: to that associated with the data. The default is set at link time.6 This qualifier overrides the link-time specification.J Note that data may not be sent to a slaved task running on a virtual ter- minal.C 2 TASK_NAMEL' INSTALL/TASK_NAME:taskname [$]filespecEG The /TASK_NAME qualifier specifies the name by which the task is to betA referred. The task name is from 1 to 6 characters. The default oK is set at link time. This qualifier overrides the link-time specification.s2 UIC  INSTALL/UIC:[uic] [$]filespecE The /UIC qualifier specifies the default UIC for the task. This task B UIC determines in what file-protection class it belongs, and thus! directly influences file access.e4 The square brackets around UIC are required syntax.2 NORESIDENT_HEADER/#RESIDENT_HEADER2 RESIDENT_HEADER ( INSTALL/[NO]RESIDENT_HEADER [$]filespecC The /NORESIDENT_HEADER qualifier allows you to install a task withi@ its header placed immediately below the task image. Since thisC header--also called an external task header--is placed outside ofhD pool, pool space is increased. /NORESIDENT_HEADER is the default. G /RESIDENT_HEADER means that the task's header is placed in pool. You > may have some privileged tasks that access their own header. B Installing these tasks with /RESIDENT_HEADER allows them to work,= until you can modify them to support external task headers. 2 NOINTERPRETERl #INTERPRETER 2 INTERPRETERl d$ INSTALL/[NO]INTERPRETER [$]filespec@ The /INTERPRETER qualifier indicates that you are installing a ? command line interpreter task. The default is /NOINTERPRETER.s the default. G /RESIDENT_HEADER means that the task's header is placed in pool. You > may have some privileged tasks that access their own header. B Installing these tasks with /RESIDENT_HEADER allows them to work,= until you can modify them to support external task headers. 2 NOINTERPRETERl #INTERPRETER 2 INTERPRETERl d$ INSTALL/[NO]INTERPRETER [$]filespec@ The /INTERPRETER qualifier indicates that you are installing a ? command line interpreter A The LIBRARY command performs maintenance operations on a librarysD file. A library file is a direct access file containing one or more modules.0A There are three types of libraries. Object libraries hold objectc< modules and can be used as input to the Task Builder. Macro? libraries hold source macros and can be called in by the macrof? assembler. Universal libraries can have any contents. See theL8 Micro/RSX Users Guide Volume 2 for further information.= The LIBRARY command performs the following eight operations:r" CREATE DELETE EXTRACT INSERT & REPLACE REMOVE COMPRESS LIST3 For more information, type HELP LIBRARY operation.e2 CREATEC LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])][/qualifier[s]] libspec [infilespec[,s]]b GLOBAL:n /[NO]GLOBALS" MODULES:n /MACRO# BLOCKS:n /OBJECT - /SELECTIVE_SEARCHe+ /SQUEEZE iA /UNIVERSAL mJ The LIBRARY/CREATE command creates a library file and optionally inserts O one or more modules into it. The GLOBAL argument to LIBRARY/CREATE specifies eO the number of entry point table (EPT) entries to allocate. The default number cN is 512 for object libraries. The number of entry points is always forced to I zero for macro libraries. The MODULES argument specifies the number of eL module name table (MNT) entries to allocate. The default value is 256. The O maximum number of entries is 4096. The BLOCKS argument specifies the size of rB the library in 256-word blocks. The default size is 100 blocks. 7 For further help, type HELP LIBRARY CREATE qualifier. 3 NOGLOBALSt#GLOBALS 3 GLOBALSt@ LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/[NO]GLOBALS libspec [infilespec[,s]]N The /NOGLOBALS qulaifier specifies that global symbols are not to be includedK in the entry point table. Use this qualifier if you wish to use the same ( global symbols in more than one module.J The /GLOBALS form of this qualifier is a no-op. You must use the GLOBAL G argument to LIBRARY/CREATE to specify the number of entry point table entries.r3 MACROp: LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/MACRO libspec [infilespec[,s]]I The /MACRO qualifier specifies that the library being created is a macro5 library. Default file type for the library is .MLB.l3 OBJECT; LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/OBJECT libspec [infilespec[,s]]rH The /OBJECT qualifier specifies that the library being created consistsH of object modules. This is the default. The default file type for the library is .OLB.A 3 UNIVERSALs> LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/UNIVERSAL libspec [infilespec[,s]]F The /UNIVERSAL qualifier specifies that the library being created is E a universal library. The default file type for the library is .UNI.y3 SELECTIVE_SEARCHE LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/SELECTIVE_SEARCH libspec [infilespec[,s]]TD The /SELECTIVE_SEARCH qualifier sets the selective search attributeE bit in the module header of object modules as they are inserted intot an object library.yE Object modules with the selective search attribute are given special/: treatment by the Task Builder. Global symbols defined inE modules with the selective search attribute are only included in the H Task Builder's symbol table if they have previously been referenced by  other modules.[ 3 SQUEEZETB LIBRARY/CREATE[:(arg[,s])]/MACRO/SQUEEZE libspec [infilespec[,s]]D The /SQUEEZE qualifier will reduce the size of macro definitions byD eliminating all trailing blanks and tabs, blank lines, and comments from macro text.eG Macros that have been squeezed not only take up less room in the macrodF library file, but also take up less memory in the assembler when they are invoked.nA See HELP LIBRARY COMPRESS for information on compressing entire b libraries.d2 DELETE" LIBRARY/DELETE libspec module[,s]D The LIBRARY/DELETE command deletes modules from a library file. TheB list can contain up to 15 modules. Each module is separated by a comma. For example:,* LIBRARY/DELETE LIBRARY.OLB MOD1,MOD2,MOD3J See HELP LIBRARY REMOVE for information on removing global symbols (entry9 points) from a library. See also HELP LIBRARY COMPRESS.r2 REMOVE" LIBRARY/REMOVE libspec global[,s]I The LIBRARY/REMOVE command removes global symbols (entry points) from a K library. The list of globals can include up to 15 elements. Each elemento is separated by commas. For example:o- LIBRARY/REMOVE LIBRARY.OLB GLOB1,GLOB2,GLOB3 L See HELP LIBRARY DELETE for information on deleting modules from a library. 2 EXTRACT 7 LIBRARY/EXTRACT[/OUTPUT[:filespec]] libspec module[,s] E The LIBRARY/EXTRACT command reads one or more modules from a libraryOG file and writes them into a specified output file. The module list cano? contain up to 8 elements. Each element is separated by commas.fG The default for the /OUTPUT qualifier is to write the modules to your m terminal. 2 INSERT3 LIBRARY/INSERT[/qualifier[s]] libspec filespec[,s]e /[NO]GLOBALS /SELECTIVE_SEARCHe /SQUEEZEE The LIBRARY/INSERT command inserts one or more files as modules intocH a library file. Type HELP LIBRARY INSERT qualifier for additional help. 3 NOGLOBALS#GLOBALS 3 GLOBALS 2 LIBRARY/INSERT/[NO]GLOBALS libspec [filespec[,s]]= The /NOGLOBALS qualifier specifies that entry points for theC specified modules are not to be included in the entry point table.r0 The /GLOBALS form of this qualifier is a no-op.3 SELECTIVE_SEARCH5 LIBRARY/INSERT/SELECTIVE_SEARCH libspec filespec[,s] D The /SELECTIVE_SEARCH qualifier sets the selective search attributeE bit in the module header of object modules as they are inserted intod an object library.LE Object modules with the selective search attribute are given specials: treatment by the Task Builder. Global symbols defined inE modules with the selective search attribute are only included in thepI Task Builder's symbol table if they were previously referenced by other V modules.L 3 SQUEEZER2 LIBRARY/INSERT/MACRO/SQUEEZE libspec filespec[,s]D The /SQUEEZE qualifier will reduce the size of macro definitions byD eliminating all trailing blanks and tabs, blank lines, and comments from macro text.jG Macros that have been squeezed not only take up less room in the macroeF library file, but also take up less memory in the assembler when they are invoked.aA See HELP LIBRARY COMPRESS for information on compressing entire h libraries.o2 LIST. LIBRARY/LIST[:filespec][/qualifier[s] libspec# /[NO]NAMESe /BRIEFe /FULL@ The LIBRARY/LIST command produces a listing of the names of allG modules in the library file. The default output file for LIBRARY/LIST C is your terminal. Type HELP LIBRARY LIST qualifier for additionale HELP. 3 ENTRIESt#NAMES 3 NONAMESh#NAMES3 NAMESa& LIBRARY/LIST[:filespec]/NAMES libspecD The /NAMES qualifier produces a listing of the names of all modulesG in the library file and their corresponding entry points. The default 7 is /NONAMES, which means the entry points are omitted.L3 BRIEFB& LIBRARY/LIST[:filespec]/BRIEF libspecM The /BRIEF qualifier specifies that you wish only module names listed. ThisA is the default.3 FULL% LIBRARY/LIST[:filespec]/FULL libspecaF The /FULL qualifier produces a listing of the names of all modules inH the library file and gives a module description of each: that is, size,5 date of insertion, and module-dependent information.a 2 REPLACEr4 LIBRARY/REPLACE[/qualifier[s]] libspec filespec[,s] /[NO]GLOBALS /SELECTIVE_SEARCH /SQUEEZEM The LIBRARY/REPLACE command replaces a module in a library with a new modulesH of the same name and deletes the old module. Type HELP LIBRARY REPLACE qualifier for additional HELP.T 3 NOGLOBALSi#GLOBALS 3 GLOBALSn3 LIBRARY/REPLACE/[NO]GLOBALS libspec [filespec[,s]]n= The /NOGLOBALS qualifier specifies that entry points for thesC specified modules are not to be included in the entry point table.P The default is /GLOBALS.i3 SELECTIVE_SEARCH6 LIBRARY/REPLACE/SELECTIVE_SEARCH libspec filespec[,s]D The /SELECTIVE_SEARCH qualifier sets the selective search attributeE bit in the module header of object modules as they are inserted intoE an object library.tE Object modules with the selective search attribute are given specialO: treatment by the Task Builder. Global symbols defined inE modules with the selective search attribute are only included in thecI Task Builder's symbol table if they were previously referenced by other _ modules.L 3 SQUEEZEA3 LIBRARY/REPLACE/MACRO/SQUEEZE libspec filespec[,s]T@ The /SQUEEZE qualifier reduces the size of macro definitions byD eliminating all trailing blanks and tabs, blank lines, and comments from macro text.jG Macros that have been squeezed not only take up less room in the macroeF library file, but also take up less memory in the assembler when they are invoked.a iA See HELP LIBRARY COMPRESS for information on compressing entire y libraries.s 2 SQUEEZEe #COMPRESS_ 2 COMPRESS2 LIBRARY/COMPRESS[:(arg[,s])] libspec [newlibspec] GLOBAL:nT MODULES:n BLOCKS:nuC The LIBRARY/COMPRESS command physically deletes modules that have aC been logically deleted through LIBRARY/DELETE. This commands putstD all free space at the end of the file, making it available for new H library module inserts. Additionally, the library table specification I can be altered for the resulting library. If you specify only a single yE argument to LIBRARY COMPRESS, the parentheses are not required. If (G you specify more than one argument, the arguments must be enclosed in K% parentheses and separated by commas.hL You can specify a new filename for the compressed library. If you do not, < a new version of the library with the same name is created.> You should not confuse compressing with squeezing. See also  HELP LIBRARY CREATE SQUEEZE HELP LIBRARY INSERT SQUEEZE HELP LIBRARY REPLACE SQUEEZEu3 EPTo#GLOBALg3 GLOBAL/ LIBRARY/COMPRESS/GLOBAL:n libspec [newlibspec]tF The /GLOBAL qualifier specifies the number of entry point table (EPT)E entries to allocate. The default number is the number of EPTs in theeF old library file. The number of entry points is always forced to zero for macro libraries. 3 MNTe#MODULES 3 MODULES.0 LIBRARY/COMPRESS/MODULES:n libspec [newlibspec]G The /MODULES qualifier specifies the number of module name table (MNT)ED entries to allocate. The default value is the number of MNTs in the9 old library file. The maximum number of entries is 4096.L3 SIZE#BLOCKSi3 BLOCKS/ LIBRARY/COMPRESS/BLOCKS:n libspec [newlibspec]eD The /BLOCKS qualifier specifies the size of the library in 256-word> blocks. The default size is the size of the old library file.ibraries. 3 MNTe#MODULES 3 MODULES.0 LIBRARY/COMPRESS/MODULES:n libspec [newlibspec]G The /MODULES qualifier specifies the number of module name table (MNT)ED entries to allocate. The defa/ LINK[/qualifier[s]] filespec[s][/qualifier[s]] C The LINK command invokes the Task Builder to build a runnable taskA from object modules you have previously compiled (or assembled).t The command , $ LINK filespec1[.OBJ],filespec2[.OBJ],...  D builds a runnable task image from an object file (the output of theD MACRO-11 assembler or of a high-level language compiler). The task D image file has the same name as the object file, with the file typeC .TSK. If more than one filespec is specified, the task image file[G has the same file name as the first input filespec, but with the file l type .TSK. E Type HELP LINK MORE for more LINK information, HELP LINK QUALIFIERS F for a list of LINK qualifiers, HELP LINK qualifier for an individual qualifier description.m2 MORE LINK has the general form of 7 $ LINK/qualifier:outfile/qualifier infile/qualifierrB The space in the command separates input files from output files.= The next forms shows how to include the standard qualifiers:h9 $ LINK/TASK:fname/MAP:fname/SYM:fname/OPTIONS:fname -t -> infile/qualifier[s]C TAS or TASK produces the .TSK (task) file and you can name it withPI fname. MAP produces the .MAP (map) file and you can name it with fname. I SYM or SYMBOL_TABLE produces the .STB symbol definition file and you canm name it with fname.B OPTIONS causes prompting for Task Builder options. OPTIONS:fspecF causes the options to be read from the file named in fname. The fileC must contain the options, each on a single line. There must be no/> slashes in this file, and the file must have a .CMD filetype. AC A hyphen (-) in the command line causes continuation. Include theMF space before the hyphen if the hyphen is just before the input files. For example:p3 $ LINK/TASK:fname/MAP:fname/SYM:fname/OPTIONS -n ->infile1,infile2/QUALIFIERS Options? o $ @ Pressing RETURN in place of entering input files causes LINK to prompt you for them..B Type HELP LINK qualifier for individual qualifier descriptions or6 HELP LINK OPTIONS for a list of Task Builder options. 2 OPTIONSl% LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/OPTIONS:fspec INPUTd n@ /OPTIONS indicates that you want to use one or more of the TaskE Builder options. LINK prompts you for the options. You may specifyKB one option per line, or you may enter multiple options on a line,C each separated by a comma. When you are through entering options,rE end option input by entering a carriage return on a line by itself. N> /OPTIONS:fspec indicates that you want to specify the options= in the named file. The options should be in a vertical listAA in the file and in the correct syntax for the particular option.n( The file must have a file type of .CMD.@ Here is a list of the options that the Task Builder recognizes.H For information on a particular option, type HELP LINK OPTIONS option. , ASG - Device assignment to logical units< COMMON - Task to access system-owned shared resident common% LIBR - Task to access system-owned 3 RESCOM - Task to access user-owned resident commonh4 RESLIB - Task to access user-owned resident library TASK - Task namei UNITS - Logical units usager u Abbreviation: /OPTl. Default: The Task Builder expects no options.3 ASGe/ ASG=devicename:unitnum1:unitnum2:...:unitnum10iA ASG declares the physical device that TKB assigns to one or more logical units. devicenameg@ A 2-character alphabetic device name followed by a 1- to# 2-digit octal unit number. e unitnum1...5 Octal integers indicating the logical unit numbers. + The default is ASG=SY0:1:2:3:4,TI0:5,CL0:6T3 COMMON COMMON=name:access-code[:apr]F COMMON and LIBR are functionally identical to TKB. They both declare? that the task intends to access a system-owned shared region. 1? However, by convention, COMMON identifies a shared region thatrF contains data only, and LIBR identifies a shared region that containsB code only. If you specify COMMON with an I- and D-space task, itF causes the common to be mapped with D-space APRs only, and the common it must contain only data. :A System-owned is a definition given to a file that resides in UFDMF [1,1] on device LB: along with its associated symbol definition file.C Therefore, a system-owned common or library is one that resides atr that location.  namenF A 1- to 6-character Radix-50 name that specifies the common orC library. TKB looks for the symbol definition file with the B same name as that of the common or library and with a .STB. extension in UFD [1,1] on device LB:. access-code= The type of access (read/write or read/only) the task F requires. RW indicates read-write and RO indicates read-only. aprF An integer in the range of 1 to 7 that specifies the first APRE that TKB is to reserve for the shared region. TKB recognizess= apr for a mapped system only. You can specify it forbD relocatable regions only. TKB selects the highest availableD APR by default if you do not specify omit APR and the region is relocatable. @ For an absolute shared region, the arguments in the PAR option D determine its base address and the APR that maps it when the region is built. iC In an RSX-11M-PLUS task that uses I- and D-space and a common, TKBtF considers the common as data only. The Executive maps the common withA D-space APRs only. If the same task uses LIBR as an option for aaF region, the Executive maps the library with I-space and D-space APRs.3 LIBR LIBR=name:access-code[:apr]F COMMON and LIBR are functionally identical to TKB. They both declare? that the task intends to access a system-owned shared region. ? However, by convention, COMMON identifies a shared region that1F contains data only, and LIBR identifies a shared region that containsB code only. Using LIBR with an I- and D-space task causes TKB to 9 overmap the library with both I-space and D-space APRs. rD System-owned is a definition given to a common or library file thatD resides in UFD [1,1] on device LB: along with its associated symbol definition file.  nameh6 A 1- to 6-character Radix-50 name that specifies the= common or the library. TKB looks for the symbol definitiona> file with the same name as that of the common or the library> and with an .STB extension in UFD [1,1] on device LB:. access-code7 The type of access (read-write or read-only) the taska; requires. RW indicates read-write and RO indicatesa read-only. apr2 An integer in the range of 1 to 7 that specifies5 the first APR that TKB is to reserve for the shared-5 region. TKB recognizes the APR for a mapped systemm3 only. You can specify it for relocatable regionso1 only. TKB selects the highest available APR by 2 default if you do not specify APR and the region is relocatable.B@ For an absolute shared region, the arguments in the PAR option D determine its base address and the APR that maps it when the region is built. dC In an RSX-11M-PLUS task that uses I- and D-space and a COMMON, TKBhF considers the COMMON as data only. The Executive maps the COMMON withA D-space APRs only. If the same task uses LIBR as an option for a F region, the Executive maps the library with I-space and D-space APRs.3 RESCOM" RESCOM=filespec/access-code[:apr]@ RESCOM and RESLIB are functionally identical; they both declare> that your task intends to access a user-owned shared region. @ However, by convention, RESCOM identifies a shared region that? contains only data. If you use RESCOM with an I- and D-space e@ task, TKB maps the common with D-space APRs and it must contain only data.n@ The term "user-owned" means that the resident common or library= and the symbol definition file associated with it can resideM@ under any UFD that you choose. You can specify the UFD and the= remaining portions of the filespec for RESCOM. You must not . place comments on the same line with RESCOM. filespeco: The memory image file of the resident common. Chapter 1 discusses the filespec format. access-code3 RW (read/write) or RO (read/only), indicating theu; type of access that the task requires. A privileged : task can change data in or move data into a resident: common even though TKB linked the task to the common with read/only access. a apr7 An integer in the range of 1 through 7 that specifies 8 the first APR that you want TKB to reserve for the3 common. TKB recognizes the APR argument only form/ a mapped system. You can specify it only for7 position-independent shared regions. If you omit thec. APR parameter and the shared region is/ position-independent, TKB selects the highesta" available APR to map the region.4 When a shared region is absolute, the base address6 of the region and the APR that maps it is determined3 by the arguments put into the PAR option when the  region is built. NOTESs6 1. TKB expects to find an .STB file having the same7 name as that of the memory image file, and on the7 same device and under the same UFD as that of thec memory image file.6 2. Regardless of the version number you give in the7 filespec, TKB uses the latest version of the .STBh file.e The defaults are: UFD - current terminal UIC device - SY0:p file type - .TSK file version - latestt3 RESLIB" RESLIB=filespec/access-code[:apr]9 RESLIB and RESCOM are functionally identical; they both h> declare that your task intends to access a user-owned shared = region. However, by convention, RESLIB identifies a shared h> region that contains only code. Using RESLIB with an I- and : D-space task causes TKB to overmap the library with both  I-space and D-space APRs. i@ The term "user-owned" means that the resident common or library= and the symbol definition file associated with it can resideB@ under any UFD that you choose. You can specify the UFD and the= remaining portions of the filespec for RESLIB. You must notd. place comments on the same line with RESLIB. file-spec: The memory image file of the resident common. Chapter 1" discusses filespec format. access-code8 RW (read/write) or RO (read/only), indicating the type' of access that the task requires.e apr7 An integer in the range of 1 through 7 that specifiesi8 the first APR that you want TKB to reserve for the3 common. TKB recognizes the APR argument only forr/ a mapped system. You can specify it only foru7 position-independent shared regions. If you omit the . APR parameter and the shared region is/ position-independent, TKB selects the higheste" available APR to map the region.< When a shared region is absolute, the arguments in the PARC option determine the base address of the region and the APRt. that maps it when the region is built. NOTESK5 1. TKB expects to find a .STB file having the samer7 name as that of the memory image file, and on theo4 same device and under the same UFD as those of the memory image file.6 2. Regardless of the version number you give in the7 filespec, TKB uses the latest version of the .STB. file.s The defaults are the following: UFD - current terminal UIC device - SY0:  file type - .TSK file version - latesth3 TASK TASK=tasknameE TASK specifies the name of the task (that is, the name that the taskg/ will have when you install it in the system). e taskname 9 A 1- to 6-character Radix-50 name identifying the task.B The default task name is the first 6 characters of the task image file name.t3 UNITSi UNITS=maxunitst? UNITS declares the number of logical units that the task uses.h maxunits8 A decimal integer in the range 0 to 250 specifying the5 maximum number of logical units. The UNITS keywordk9 creates tables that require dynamic memory. Therefore,n- large arguments can exhaust dynamic memory.  The default is units=6. Abbreviation: /OPTr. Default: The Task Builder expects no options. 2 NOGLOBALS #GLOBALS 2 GLOBALSh LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT/GLOBALS" LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT/NOGLOBALS > /GLOBALS informs the Task Builder to include in the .MAP file; global symbols that the input file references and defines.cB /NOGLOBALS informs the Task Builder to exclude from the .MAP file; global symbols that the input file references and defines.a Abbreviation: /GLOs6 /GLOBALS corresponds to the /MA switch in TKB format.@ Default: /GLOBALS; the Task Builder includes global symbols in the .MAP file.S2 LONG LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT TB /LONG specifies that the .MAP file that the Task Builder producesG is to include additional file information on modules used in the task pF build. The long map does not include file information on modules from the system library. AF If you include /LONG, LINK creates the /MAP qualifier as well. You doE not need to explicitly specify /MAP unless you want to supply a namer for the map file. L Abbreviation: /LON 4 /LONG corresponds to the /-SH switch in TKB format.F Default: Not /LONG; TKB does not include additional file information.2 MAPl9 LINK/TAS/MAP[:filespec]/SYM infilespec1,infilespec2,... A /MAP specifies that the Task Builder should produce a .MAP file.eA The .MAP file appears in your UFD. The default name for the maplA file is the same as that of the first input file (infilespec1). eA If you specify a filespec for the map file, the file appears in t@ your UFD. You can print the map file with the /PRINT qualifier> only if you install the task QMGPRT.TSK on your system as the= PRT... task. You may prevent printing by using the /NOPRINTf qualifier.i Abbreviation: /MAP.? /MAP corresponds to the position of the .MAP filespec in TKB. 5 Default: Not /MAP; TKB does not produce a .MAP file.n2 OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION + LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION INPUTi lB /OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION names an overlay description file (.ODL fileA type) that controls the linking of the task. You can specify noTA other input file if you use this qualifier. The .ODL file names G the input files and specifies their relationship to the Task Builder. q i Abbreviation: /OVE B /OVERLAY_DESCRIPTION corresponds to the /MP switch in TKB format.H Default: The Task Buuilder does not expect an overlay description file. 2 NOPRINT #PRINT2 PRINTY LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/PRINT INPUTl9 /NOPRINT prevents spooling the .MAP file to the printer.D@ /PRINT allows spooling of the .MAP file only if you install the. QMGPRT.TSK in your system as the PRT... task. Abbreviation: /NOPRIN or /PRINp- /PRINT corresponds to the /SP switch in TKB.T= Default: /PRINT; the Task Builder prints the map file if you & previously installed the PRT... task. 2 QUALIFIERS Command qualifiers: /[NO]GLOBALS  /INCLUDE:mod1,...,mod8l /LONG /LIBRARYI /MAP[:filespecN /OVERLAY_DESCRIPTIONU /[NO]PRINTN /SAVE /SYMBOL_TABLE[:filespec]o /SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY /MAP[:filespecf /[NO]TASK[:filespec]y /[NO]WIDE Filespec Qualifiers:y /INCLUDE:(module1,...modulen) /LIBRARY/ /OVERLAY_DESCRIPTIONR /[NO]GLOBALS 2 SAVE LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/SAVE INPUT PD /SAVE preserves the indirect command file that LINK creates to passE commands to the Task Builder. This file, named ATLNK.TMP, consists D of TKB commands translated from your LINK command. You can use this@ file to duplicate the task build by using a LINK command in the following form: Y $ LINK @ATLNK.CMDf /A You should rename ATLNK.TMP if you want to save it. LINK createsDA a new file called ATLNK.TMP each time you issue a LINK command. L2 SYMBOL_TABLE+ LINK/TAS/MAP/SYMBOL_TABLE[:filespec] INPUTe s> /SYMBOL_TABLE specifies that the Task Builder is to produce aE symbol definition file. If you do no specify the filespec argument,oB the symbol definition file is given the same name as that of the+ first input file. The file type is .STB. m Abbreviation: /SYM[:filespec]= /SYMBOL_TABLE corresponds to the positional placement of thea .STB filespec in TKB.E Default: None. The Task Builder produces no symbol definition file.2 NOSYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY#SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY 2 SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY s. LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY INPUT0 LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NOSYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY INPUTG /SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY directs the Task Builder to include in the maps> file the names of routines it added to your task from SYSLIB.A It also includes in the .MAP file global symbols that the symboloH definition file contains of any shared region to which the task refers.E Those global symbols are those which the task defines or references.DF This map is usually longer than the default map. The map informationE displays the contributions that SYSLIB or the shared regions make toD the task. ? If you include /SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY, LINK includes the /MAPhD qualifier as well. You do not have to specify /MAP unless you want$ to supply a name for the map file. & Abbreviation: /SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAYE /SYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAY corresponds to the /MA switch in TKB format.o# Default: /NOSYSTEM_LIBRARY_DISPLAYf2 NOTASK#TASKs2 TASK i# LINK/TASK[:filespec]/MAP/SYM INPUTu LINK/NOTASK/MAP/SYM INPUT d$ /EXECUTABLE and /TASK are synonyms.C /TASK specifies that the Task Builder should generate a task image_F file. This is the default. If a filespec is not specified, the taskD image file is given the same name as the first input file, with the file type .TSK. tB /NOTASK specifies that the Task Builder should not produce a taskE image file. /NOTASK is useful when you want to use some facility offD the Task Builder without building a task, for example, to generate new map file. M Abbreviation: /TASEA /TAS corresponds to the positional task filespec of .TSK in TKB.o Default: /TAS2 NOWIDE#WIDE 2 WIDE LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/WIDE INPUT LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM/NOWIDE INPUT l@ /WIDE specifies that you want the Task Builder to print the mapD in 132-column format. /NOWIDE specifies that you want to print the. Task Builder map in narrow 80-column format.  Abbreviation: /WID 3 /WIDE corresponds to the /WI switch in TKB format., Default: /NOWIDEe 2 LIBRARYm' LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT1,INPUTN/LIBRARYAA /LIBRARY identifies the input file as an object module library. f= o The library file must contain relocatable object modules.TA o The library file must be to the right of the string of input t; files that contain references that the library defines.W= o If you use the library file more than once in a continuedrA command line, you must also use /LIBRARY again. For example,s1 $ LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT1,INPUT2/LIBRARY-D& ->INPUT3,INPUT4,INPUT2/LIBRARYC o The Task Builder uses /LIBRARY as the switch /LB within overlayd< .ODL files to define libraries to the overlay structure. Abbreviation: /LIBo9 /LIBRARY corresponds to the use of the /LB switch in TKBt Default: Not /LIBRARY 2 INCLUDE ; LINK/TAS/MAP/SYM INPUT1,.../INCLUDE(:module1,...,modulen)  eF Use /INCLUDE with an input file that is a library. You cannot use it for any other type of file. E /INCLUDE causes TKB to extract from the library the modules named asUE arguments of the qualifier regardless of whether the modules containi( definitions for unresolved references. F You can use /INCLUDE to specify up to eight module names, enclosed inC parentheses and separated by commas. In this case, TKB takes onlyA those modules from the library. The default filetype for thesee= modules is .OBJ. The assembly process defines module names.YD You can use the /SELECTIVE_SEARCH qualifier in the command sequenceE with both the /LIBRARY or /INCLUDE qualifiers to perform a selectiveu search for global definitions.  Abbreviation: /INC: t@ /INCLUDE corresponds to using the /LB switch in TKB with module? qualifiers as, /LB:module1,module2,...,modulen. Exceptions: d6 o The library file has a default filetype of .OLB.> o The library file from which TKB extracts modules can be ' anywhere in the input file stringe= o The library file with the /INCLUDE qualifier can appearo. more than once in the input file string.D o Do not use the /CONCATENATE qualifier in the same command line with /INLCUDENE o You may use /LIBRARY and /INCLUDE in the same command line, but; you must specify the library name for each qualifier.: Default: Not /INCLUDEe has a default filetype of .OLB.> o The library file from which TKB extracts modules can be ' anywhere in the input file stringe= o The library file with the /INCLUDE qualifier can appearo. more than once in the input file string.D o Do not use the /CONCATENATE qualifier in the same command line with /INLCUDENE o You may use /LIBRARY and /INCLUDE in the same command line, but; you must specify the library name for each qualifier.: Def LOGOUT[/[NO]HOLD]H The LOGOUT command terminates a user session on the system. You should J log out when you finish a session, so that no one else has access to the H system from your account. If the terminal you are using is in a public F terminal area, logging off the system also frees the terminal so that someone else can log on.e Abbreviation: LO J The /HOLD qualifier to the LOGOUT command is for use on remote or DECnet L host terminals. If you include this qualifier, the terminal is logged out H but the line is not hung up, thus allowing you to log in again without G reconnecting the line. The default is /NOHOLD, meaning that the line c" is also hung up when you log out.M When you log out, all of your allocated and mounted devices are deallocated hJ and dismounted, and all nonprivileged tasks and certain privileged tasks L running on your terminal are aborted. If [1,2]SYSLOGOUT.CMD exists, it is - submitted to the indirect command processor.eC On Micro/RSX systems with Resource Accounting active, you will be G told how long you have been logged into the system, the amount of CPU T; time you have used, and the number of tasks you have run. up when you log out.M When you log out, all of your allocated and mounted devices are deallocated hJ and dismounted, and all nonprivileged tasks and certain privileged tasks L running on your terminal are aborted. If [1,2]SYSLOGOUT.CMD exists, it is - submitted to the indirect command processor.eC On Micro/RSX systems with MESSAGE/ERROR_LOG messagetextF This command inserts text into the Error Log File. The text appears H in reports produced by the ANALYZE/ERROR_LOG command. The message can - be any text string up to 79 characters long.ion;DEF KEY CONT D AS "CUT'?'Delete to: ''." ! DELETE TO TARGET1ADEF KEY CONT E AS "' '." !LOCATES 2 CONSECUTIVE SPACES )DEF KEY CONT G AS "7ASC." ! Insert bell3DEF KEY CONT L AS "EXT %L." ! BACK TO LAST BUFFER>DEF KEY CONT N AS "EXT C=MAIN.." ! BACK TO MF MOUNT declares a volume to be logically known to the system, on-line,B and available for use. Some qualifiers can be used to mount bothC disks and tapes, although other qualifiers are limited to mountingA- disks and other random-addressable devices. B The MOUNT command for disks and other random-addressable devices:' MOUNT[/qualifier[s]] ddnn: volumelabelo& Qualifiers for both disks and tapes: ' /DEFAULT:arg /FILE_PROTECTION:(code)  SAVE /FOREIGNk& [NO]UNLOAD /OVERRIDE:IDENTIFICATION* /PARAMETERS:"user parameters"$ /PROCESSOR:arg /PROTECTION:(code) acpname /PUBLICe! UNIQUE /[NO]SHAREABLEs /[NO]SHOW /SYSTEM% /[NO]WAIT /[NO]WRITEA1 Qualifiers for disks and other Files-11 devices:T M' /ACCESSED:n /EXTENSION:n /OWNER:[uic]d /UNLOCK /WINDOW:arg n (USER:n,INDEX:n)a7 For help on the qualifiers, type HELP MOUNT qualifier._2 ACPI #PROCESSOR2 UNIQUE #PROCESSOR 2 PROCESSORO& MOUNT/PROCESSOR:arg ddnn: volumelabel acpnamer UNIQUEA Allows privileged users to specify the name of the ACP to use toNE support file activity on the volume. In most cases, you can use the TH default ACP. The default ACP depends on the the device type. You only F have to specify an ACP in special cases. If an ACP has been written J for a custom application in your installation, you will need to use that J ACP for volumes used by that application. You will also have to include D the /FOREIGN qualifier in this case. You may also need to use the < /PARAMETERS qualifier to enter parameters used by that ACP.J The UNIQUE argument specifies that a dedicated ACP is to be used for the I volume being mounted. You do not name an ACP with the UNIQUE argument.lN MOUNT creates a copy of the F11ACP if the device is a disk or DECtape, or of O the MTAACP, if the device is a magtape. This unique ACP will be given a name vL of the form ddnnF1 or ddnnAP. When the volume is dismounted and the file J processor exits, the ACP is automatically removed. On Micro/RSX only, if N the ACP (F11ACP or MTAACP) is installed in secondary pool, /PROCESSOR:UNIQUE  is the default. s 2 EXTENSION $ MOUNT/EXTENSION:n ddnn: volumelabelC The /EXTENSION qualifier specifies the default number of blocks byFH which a file will be extended when it has exhausted its allotted space.H The default is whatever value was specified when the volume was initia-H lized. This qualifier may be used to override the initialization value.2 FILE_CONTROL_BLOCKSc #ACCESSEDd 2 ACCESSED# MOUNT/ACCESSED:n ddnn: volumelabelPF Specifies the approximate number of directories that will be accessedB simultaneously during the mount. Legal values for n range from 1< through 127. F11ACP maintains a list of most recently usedC directories. The value specified for /ACCESSED sets the number of.? entries in this list. In general, directory operations can bewC significantly speeded up by increasing this value. If a directorylF appears in the list, no disk I/O is required to find the directory inC the MFD. In addition, directory operations take place without thefF necessity of reading the directory file header. If this qualifier isF not explicitly stated, the default is the value specified at the timeF the volume was initialized. Note that increasing the /ACCESSED value+ increases the amount of system pool used. n 2 FOREIGNi MOUNT/FOREIGN ddnn:C Specifies that the volume being mounted is not in Files-11 format.lE Such volumes are called foreign volumes. Note that before a disk orn3 tape has been initialized, it is a foreign volume.lK On Micro/RSX all volumes must be mounted. This qualifier is required for l mounting foreign volumes. G Since a foreign format is unknown to the system, no label is specifiedi on the command line.i 2 NOUNLOAD#DEFAULT 2 OVERRIDE1 MOUNT/OVERRIDE:IDENTIFICATION ddnn: volumelabel ML /OVERRIDE:IDENTIFICATION allows privileged users to mount a volume without D using the volume label (or the fileset ID for magtape). This is a  privileged qualifier.2 OWNERi$ MOUNT/OWNER:[uic] ddnn: volumelabelG Specifies the owner of the volume. The brackets are required syntax.I Inclusion of this qualifier overrides the OWNER value established when y the volume was initialized.oL The /OWNER interacts with the protection established for the file and the D volume. See HELP MOUNT PROTECTION and HELP MOUNT FILE_PROTECTION. 2 PARAMETERSI MOUNT/FOREIGN/ACP:acpname/PARAMETERS:"user parameters" ddnn: volumelabelaI Enables you to enter commands to an ACP that is not DIGITAL standard. AvH maximum of 40 characters enclosed in quotation marks can be passed to aD foreign ACP. This qualifier is valid on Micro/RSX systems only if 7 you use the /ACP qualifier and the /FOREIGN qualifier.h2 FILE_PROTECTIONw/ MOUNT/FILE_PROTECTION:(code) ddnn: volumelabelhH Specifies the default file protection for any new files created on the J volume while it is mounted. The /FILE_PROTECTION qualifier combines withM /OWNER to control access to files. The file-protection code is enclosed in dJ parentheses in the form (SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER:RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R) where" R means allow read access to file# W means allow write access to file " E means allow file to be extended! D means allow file to be deletedEE See also HELP MOUNT PROTECTION for information on volume protection.eF The default file protection can be overridden by specifying another J protection when the file is created. If this qualifier is not included, I the value specified at the time the volume was initialized is applied. s 2 PROTECTION* MOUNT/PROTECTION:(code) ddnn: volumelabelE Specifies the volume protection for Files-11 disks. This protectiono@ overrides the volume protection established when the volume wasA initialized. The /PROTECTION qualifier combines with the /OWNERv- qualifier to control access to the volume. iA The file-protection code is enclosed in parentheses in the form l2 (SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER:RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R) where" R means allow read access to file# W means allow write access to file" E means allow file to be extended! D means allow file to be deletedsD See also HELP MOUNT FILE_PROTECTION for information on setting the F default protection for new files created on the volume while mounted.2 NOSHOW#SHOWa2 SHOW! MOUNT/[NO]SHOW ddnn: volumelabelrF The /SHOW qualifier displays information on the entering terminal for4 the volume being mounted. /NOSHOW is the default. C Here is the display format for disks and other random-addressable W devices:w Volume Information! Class: Files-11 or Foreign Device: ddnn: Volume label: label5 Pack Serial: serial number supplied by manufacturern9 Owner: [g,m] (volume owner, override with /OWNER)l' Protection: code (volume protection)H- Default: code (default file protection)/ Processor: acpname2 UNLOAD#DEFAULT 2 DEFAULTn$ MOUNT/DEFAULT:arg ddnn: volumelabel SAVE [NO]UNLOAD , This qualifier only applies to DU: devices.H It specifies the default that will apply when the volume is dismounted.C SAVE is a privileged argument and specifies that the medium is notuG unloaded and can be accessed for reads and writes by privileged tasks.i= UNLOAD specifies that the medium is to be unloaded after thef? dismount. This is the default for Files-11 volumes. NOUNLOADeF specifies that the medium is not to be unloaded. This is the defaultM for foreign volumes. Remember, these values can also be set when you issue U/ the DISMOUNT command. See also HELP DISMOUNT. I Only privileged users can specify /DEFAULT:UNLOAD for a multiunit devicei (for example, an RC25).2 UNLOCK MOUNT/UNLOCK ddnn: volumelabelnF Specifies that the volume index file, [0,0]INDEXF.SYS, is unlocked. F This means the file can be read and written to. Normally, this file is locked and can be read only.I This qualifier has nothing to do with hardware or software writelocking.RI Its main use is in conjunction with VFY, the File Structure Verificationn Utility.o2 WINDOW# MOUNT/WINDOW:arg ddnn: volumelabels nA FULL (USER:n,INDEX:n)E The /WINDOW qualifier specifies the number of mapping pointers to beeB allocated for file windows. A file window consists of a number ofB mapping pointers; it is stored in memory when the file is opened.H The argument n specifies a default for all files opened on the volume. , The values for n can be from 1 through 129.J The USER and INDEX arguments can be combined or specified singly. USER:nH specifies the user default value for the volume. INDEX:n specifies theL number of pointers to allocate to the index file window. The argument FULLI specifies that you want windows created that map as much of the file as t7 possible. FULL can also replace n for USER and INDEX.rG The default value is set when the volume is initialized. This qualiferi4 may be used to override the initialization default.2 SYSTEM#PUBLIC2 PUBLIC MOUNT/PUBLIC ddnn: volumelabeli MOUNT/SYSTEM ddnn: volumelabelG /PUBLIC and /SYSTEM are synonymous, privileged qualifiers. These makenL the mounted volume available to all users who are allowed access under the M volume-protection and file-protection codes established for the volume when i mounted. nE If you state this qualifier explicitly when mounting a volume on an eE allocated (private) device, the device is automatically deallocated i and set public, if necessary.B If you do not state this qualifier explicitly, and the device is 9 already set public, the mount will default to /PUBLIC. iC See also HELP MOUNT SHAREABLE, HELP ALLOCATE, and HELP SET DEVICE.u 2 NOSHAREABLEl #SHAREABLE 2 SHAREABLEv& MOUNT/[NO]SHAREABLE ddnn: volumelabelL Specifies whether the volume is to be mounted shareable. A volume mounted K /SHAREABLE can be mounted multiple times by the same or different users. e> Each user's access is determined by the volume-protection and? file-protection codes established for the volume when mounted. H If you mount the volume /SHAREABLE, and the device is allocated or set B public, the device is automatically deallocated or set nonpublic.F A volume mounted /NOSHAREABLE is dedicated for your private use. No A other user can access the volume. For Files-11 volumes mounted 7 /NOSHAREABLE, your privileges are SYSTEM privileges. iD If you specify /NOSHAREABLE explicitly when mounting a volume on anA device, the device is automatically allocated and set nonpublic.f; If the device is already allocated, the mount defaults to RA /NOSHAREABLE. If the device is not allocated or set public, the a: default is /SHAREABLE. Otherwise, the device is /PUBLIC.? See also HELP MOUNT PUBLIC, HELP ALLOCATE and HELP SET DEVICE.e2 NOWAIT#WAITv2 WAIT! MOUNT/[NO]WAIT ddnn: volumelabelOD Specifies whether you require operator assistance in performing theD mount. The main use of this qualifier is for batch jobs, indirect@ command files, or terminals distant from the machine room. TheF default is /WAIT for mounts in batch jobs and indirect command files,C and /NOWAIT for interactive mounts. If the mount is included in aOB batch job or indirect command file, or if you specify /WAIT in anA interactive mount, a message concerning the mount is sent to the[E operator's console and the mount is not completed until the operatorsA takes action. If you specify /NOWAIT in a batch job or indirect G command file, or if the mount is interactive, no message appears. ThehF medium must have been previously placed on the device and readied for access (spun up/on-line). 2 NOWRITEi#WRITE2 WRITE." MOUNT/[NO]WRITE ddnn: volumelabel9 Specifies whether the volume is to be write-protected. 3 If /WRITE is specified or implied, the volume can t9 be written to as permitted by the volume-protection and cA file-protection codes established for the volume when mounted. T: If /NOWRITE is specified, no one may write to the volume. The default is /WRITE.p2 VOLUME& MOUNT/VOLUME:(volumeID[,volumeID[s]) D Specifies volume identifiers. If you wish to check volume-IDs, you must specify this qualifier. WRITE ddnn: volumelabel9 Specifies whether the volume is to be write-protected. 3 If /WRITE is specified or implied, the volume can t9 be written to as permitted by the volume-protection and cA file-protection codes established for the volume when mounted. T: If /NOWRITE is specified, no on; The PRINT command submits one or more files for printing. f u4 PRINT[/qualifier[s]] filespec[s][/filequalifier[s]] o0 The following command qualifiers are available: D /AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm) /[NO]HOLD /PAGE_COUNT:nB /JOB_COUNT:n /[NO]JOB_PAGE /PRIORITY:nC /NOFLAG_PAGE /LENGTH:n /[NO]RESTARTfE /FORMS:n /[NO]LOWERCASE /[NO]UPPERCASEaD /NAME:jobname /QUEUE:queuename /DEVICE:ddnn:B /[NO]TRANSFER /COPIES:n /[NO]DELETE- The following file qualifiers are available:l i( /COPIES:n /[NO]DELETE /[NO]TRANSFERB To obtain help for any PRINT qualifier, type HELP PRINT qualifier Abbreviation: P 2 NOTRANSFER #TRANSFER 2 TRANSFER PRINT/[NO]TRANSFER files[pecs] G The /NOTRANSFER qualifier inhibits the copying of the file to LB: for NF printing. The default is /TRANSFER. This can be a command qualifier or a file qualifier.E2 DEVICE PRINT/DEVICE:ddnn: files[pecs]OC The /DEVICE qualifier specifies the device on which you want your aF output to appear. The default is the device or devices served by the PRINT queue.N2 QUEUEe" PRINT/QUEUE:queuename files[pecs]E The /QUEUE qualifier specifies the name of the print queue in which E6 the job is to be placed. The default queue is PRINT.2 NAME PRINT/NAME:jobname files[pecs]nD The /NAME qualifier permits you to give a name of from 1 through 9 C Radix-50 characters to your QMG print job. The default is to name/. the job after the first file name in the job.2 AFTERr * PRINT/AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm) files[pecs] r@ The /AFTER qualifier allows you to specify that your job shouldI be delayed until after a specified date and time. The job will not print K immediately at that time, but will become eligible to be printed, and willA& compete with other jobs at that time. TE You may specify either the date, or the time, or both. If you do notdB specify a date, the current date is assumed. To specify the dateC without the time, omit the hh and mm values, but still include theA colons. y h Examples: ]= PRINT/AFTER:(18:00) LONGFILE.TXT ! print the file after 6 pm  uB PRINT/AFTER:(1-APR-84) JOKE.TXT ! print the file on April 1, 1984 2 JOB_COUNTi #JOBCOUNTa 2 JOBCOUNT t PRINT/JOB_COUNT:n files rO The command qualifier /JOB_COUNT specifies how many copies of the complete jobtC are to be printed. In the example below, two copies of the job aretD printed. Each one consists of one copy of FILE1.TXT followed by one copy of FILE2.TXT.u Example:n d' PRINT/JOB_COUNT:2 FILE1.TXT, FILE2.TXT I2 COPIES PRINT/COPIES:n filepec[s] h PRINT filespec/COPIES:nF The file qualifier /COPIES specifies how many copies of the file are J to be printed. In the following example, one copy of the job is printed, I containing two copies of FILE1.TXT followed by two copies of FILE2.TXT.e $ PRINT/COPIES:2 FILE1.TXT, FILE2.TXT iD Use the filespec qualifier to override the command qualifier. see  also HELP PRINT JOB_COUNT.F2 DELETE  PRINT filespsec/[NO]DELETEC PRINT/[NO]DELETE filespec[s]I; The /DELETE qualifier specifies that one or more files areS8 to be deleted after printing. The default is /NODELETE. tL As a filespec qualifier, /DELETE indicates that that file is to be deleted.G As a command qualifier, /DELETE indicates that all files named in the fO command are to be deleted. Use the filespec qualifier to override the commandl qualifier.r ? PRINT FILE1.TXT,FILE2.TXT/DE,FILE3.TXT !Delete FILE2.TXT onlyE= PRINT/DELETE FILE1.TXT,FILE2.TXT,FILE3.TXT !Delete all filescI PRINT/DELE FILE1.TXT,FILE2.TXT/NODEL,FILE3.TXT !Delete all but FILE2.TXTe 2 FLAG_PAGEr i PRINT/NOFLAG_PAGE filespecs B The /FLAG_PAGE qualifier specifies whether or not files in a job C should be preceeded by file flag pages. A file flag page separateseG files and contains the name of the file. The default is /NOFLAG_PAGE.  o2 FORMSh o PRINT /FORMS:n filespec[s]I FL The /FORMS qualifier specifies that your job is to be printed on a special K form. Your installation may have different forms for different tasks, suchOL as normal computer paper, narrow white paper for letters, check forms, etc. l% The default form number is /FORMS:0.p2 NOHOLD#HOLDr2 HOLD i PRINT/[NO]HOLD filespec[s]d O The /HOLD qualifier specifies that your job is to be held (made ineligible for D printing). You must then release the job to allow it to be printed. i See HELP RELEASE JOBO 2 JOB_PAGES #JOBPAGESh 2 JOBPAGES t PRINT/[NO]JOB_PAGE filespec[s]. uE The /JOB_PAGE qualifier specifies whether or not your job should be 6 preceded by job flag pages. The default is /JOB_PAGE. kF If you specify /NOJOB_PAGE, your job will still start on a new page, G but job flag pages will not be printed. You might do this if you were e6 printing on a special form, particularly a short one.2 LENGTH  PRINT/LENGTH:n filespec[s]  aE The /LENGTH qualifier specifies how many lines should be printed on AC a physical printer page. If, within 'n' lines, a formfeed has not _I been printed, the despooler will insert one. In this way, you can limit j the amount of text on a page. PN This is particularly useful if you are going to place the output in a listingK binder. By using the /LENGTH qualifier you can prevent the despooler from pI printing over a perforation, which will be difficult to read when bound.L9 For instance, /LENGTH:60 works on 66-line line printers.h mH The default, /LENGTH:0, specifies that no implied form feeds should be inserted. 2 NOLOWERCASE_ #LOWERCASE e 2 LOWERCASEl w PRINT/[NO]LOWERCASE files uN The /LOWERCASE qualifier specifies that your job must be printed on a printerF that has been initialized with lowercase characters. The default is  /NOLOWERCASE. oJ Notice that /LOWERCASE does not effect a lower to uppercase translation. 2 It is just a requirement for selecting a printer. 2 PAGE_COUNT #PAGECOUNT 2 PAGECOUNTs  PRINT/PAGE_COUNT:n filespec[s]i sK /PAGE_COUNT allows you to specify a limit on the number of pages of outputEN your job will produce. If the specified number of pages is exceeded, an error( message appears and the job is deleted. p= The default is /PAGE_COUNT:0, which specifies no page limit.T 2 PRIORITY  PRINT/PRIORITY:n filespec[s]t OD /PRIORITY allows you to specify a priority for your print job. ThisM priority has no effect on how quickly the job is printed once it is started,s- but it determines its position in the queue.A CL Privileged users may specify any priority between 1 and 250. Non-privileged5 users may only specify priorities between 1 and 150.e dF The default is /PRIORITY:50. /PRIORITY:0 is the same as /PRIORITY:50. 2 NORESTART #RESTART 2 RESTART  e PRINT/[NO]RESTART filespec[s] IG /RESTART specifies whether or not your job is to be restarted from the ! beginning, if it is interrupted.  eN If you specify /RESTART and if your job is stopped for some reason, your job > starts over again from the beginning once it starts printing. M If you specify the default /NORESTART qualifier, if your job is stopped for b? some reason, your job continues from where it left off once it  starts again. 2 NOUPPERCASE #UPPERCASE 2 UPPERCASEE R PRINT/[NO]UPPERCASE filespec[s] ]L /UPPERCASE specifies that the print job can be sent to a line printer that 9 does not have the lowercase character set (the default).RRT and if your job is stopped for some reason, your job > starts over again from the beginning once it starts printing. M If you specify the default /NORESTART qualifier, if your job is stopped for b? some reason, your job continues from where it left off once it  starts again. 2 NOUPPERCASE #UPPERCASE 2 UPPERCASEE R PRINT/[NO]UPPERCASE filespec[s] ]L /UPPERCASE specifies that the print job can be sent to a line printer that 9 does not have the lowercase character set (the defa PURGE[/qualifier[s]] filespec /KEEP:n /[NO]LOGn /NOWARNINGS /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /SINCE:dd-mmm-yyr /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yye) /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy /TODAYa /EXCLUDE:filespecD The PURGE command deletes all but the latest versions of files and E releases the storage space the deleted files occupy. Normally, the nA PURGE command deletes all but the most recent version of a file.l2 KEEP PURGE/KEEP:n filespec[s]p fF The /KEEP qualifier saves the last n versions of a file. If you haveE three versions of a file numbered 1, 2, and 3, /KEEP:2 will save theyE last two numerical versions (2 and 3) and delete version 1. However,yE if the versions were numbered 1, 2, and 4, /KEEP:2 would try to savetD the last two numerical versions (3 and 4) and delete versions 1 andD 2. Since version 3 did not originally exist, you would be left withD only one version of the file in your directory. Normally this doesC not cause problems because you usually will not have holes in youri directory like that. 2 NOLOG #LOG2 LIST#LOG2 LOGd PURGE/[NO]LOG filespec[s]A The /LOG qualifier specifies that the names of the files deleted; should be listed on your terminal. The default is /NOLOG. 2 DATE! PURGE/DATE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s] H The /DATE qualifier specifies that you wish the PURGE command to affect& only files created on the given date.2 SINCEe" PURGE/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]C The /SINCE qualifier specifies that you wish the PURGE command to y6 affect only files created on or after the given date.@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 2 THROUGHt$ PURGE/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]E The /THROUGH qualifier specifies that you wish the PURGE command to T7 affect only files created on or before the given date.s@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates.2 TODAYt PURGE/TODAY filespec[s]C The /TODAY qualifier specifies that you wish the PURGE command to s! affect only files created today.n 2 EXCLUDEt PURGE/EXCLUDE:filespec[s]D The /EXCLUDE qualifer specifies that you wish the PURGE command to D exclude the named file (or files, if named with wildcards) in its  action. 2 NOWARNINGS PURGE/NOWARNINGS filespec[s]c5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages.u can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates.2 TODAYt PURGE/TODAY filespec[s]C The /TODAY qualifier specifies that you wish the  RELEASE/ENTRY:n% RELEASE/JOB queuename [[uic]]jobnamer I The RELEASE/ENTRY command releases by entry number a print or batch job E that has been held in a queue. The RELEASE/JOB command releases by F queue name and job name a print or batch job that has been held in a D queue. These commands counteract the HOLD command. See HELP HOLD. D The RELEASE/ENTRY:n form of this command is recommended because it E unambiguously refers to a specific job. Two or more jobs in the sameuA queue may have the same name, but will never have the same entrynA number. Job entry numbers, n, are displayed with the SHOW QUEUEn command. See HELP SHOW QUEUE. eld in a queue. The RELEASE/JOB command releases by F queue name and job name a print or batch job that has been held in a D queue. These commands counteract the HOLD command. See HELP HOLD. D The RELEASE/ENTRY:n form of this command is recommended because it E unambiguously refers to a specific job. Two or more jobs in the sameuA queue may h REMOVE[/REGION] tasknameoE The REMOVE command removes from the system a task or region that wasE previously installed with the INSTALL command. REMOVE also removes . the task name form the System Task Directory.J The /REGION qualifier takes the name of a region out of the Common Block 5 Directory and partition list on Micro/RSX systems.  This is a privileged command./ RENAME [/qualifier[s]] oldfilespec newfilespecs /NOWARNINGS  /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /SINCE:dd-mmm-yyo /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yyl# /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yyd /TODAYt /EXCLUDE:filespecD The RENAME command changes the name, type, or version number of an @ existing file. You can also use this command to change the UFD1 (User File Directory) in which the file resides.a .> For help on a specific qualifier, type HELP RENAME qualifier.2 DATE. RENAME/DATE:dd-mmm-yy oldfilespec newfilespecB The /DATE qualifier effects files created only on the given date.2 SINCEm/ RENAME/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy oldfilespec newfilespecIG The /SINCE qualifier effects files created on or after the given date.M@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 2 THROUGHu1 RENAME/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy oldfilespec newfilespecFJ The /THROUGH qualifier effects files created on or before the given date.@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates.2 TODAYn% RENAME/TODAY oldfilespec newfilespecs7 The /TODAY qualifier effects files created today only.M 2 EXCLUDEm' RENAME/EXCLUDE:oldfilespec newfilespec L The /EXCLUDE qualifer directs the RENAME command to exclude the named file 5 (or files, if named with wildcards) from its action.O 2 NOWARNINGS* RENAME/NOWARNINGS oldfilespec newfilespec5 The /NOWARNINGS qualifier suppresses error messages.ore the given date.@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates.2 TODAYn% REQUEST messageF The REQUEST command sends a message to the operator's terminal (CO:).H If you want the message to include lowercase characters, enclose it in 2 quotation marks -- for example, "Please wake up."C The RUN command can be used to initiate the execution of either an D uninstalled task or an installed task from a task image file. WhenD used to run an uninstalled task (from a task image file), RUN is a ; combination command encompassing INSTALL, RUN, and REMOVE.u f1 The RUN command syntax for uninstalled tasks is:n RUN[/qualifier[s]] [$]filespec_" /[NO]CHECKPOINT /STATUS:arg4 /COMMAND:"taskcommand" :COMMAND1 /EXTENSION:n :TASK 4 /PARTITION:parname /TASK_NAME:name4 /PRIORITY:n /TIME_LIMIT:arg2 /UIC:[uic] 5 /[NO]POSTMORTEM (Advanced Programmer's Kit only) B Note that a dollar sign ($) preceding the filespec in the commandF line indicates that the task should be run from a file in the Library Directory on Micro/RSX. /J For help on a specific qualifier, type HELP RUN qualifier. See HELP RUN L INSTALLED_TASK for the RUN command syntax for an installed task. See also  HELP INSTALL. Abbreviation: R2 NOCHECKPOINT #CHECKPOINTg 2 CHECKPOINT RUN/[NO]CHECKPOINT [$]filespecI The /[NO]CHECKPOINT qualifier specifies whether or not the task is to betH checkpointable as it runs. The default is set at link-time. This quali-, fier overrides the link-time specification. 2 COMMANDa' RUN/COMMAND:"task_command" [$]filespeclI The /COMMAND qualifier makes it possible for you to pass a command to a D1 task at the same time you run it. For example, a $ RUN/COMMAND:"/LI" $PIP. 2 POSTMORTEM #NOPOSTMORTEMH2 NOPOSTMORTEM @DCLRUNPMD 2 EXTENSIONU RUN/EXTENSION:n [$]filespecI The /EXTENSION qualifier allocates n additional (octal) words of address space to a task.i 2 PARTITIONe" RUN/PARTITION:parname [$]filespecI The /PARTITION qualifier specifies the partition in which the task is toaH run. The default is set at link-time. This qualifier overrides the link3 time specification. This is a privileged command.y 2 PRIORITY RUN/PRIORITY:n [$]filespecAG The /PRIORITY qualifier specifies at what priority the task is to run. H The default is set at link-time. This qualifier overrides the link-time. specification. This is a privileged command.2 STATUS: RUN/STATUS:arg taskname (for installed tasks)< RUN/STATUS:arg taskname (for uninstalled tasks) :COMMAND  :TASKC The /STATUS:TASK qualifier returns exit status from the task beings7 run rather than from the RUN command. The default is $B /STATUS:COMMAND, which returns exit status from the RUN command. E The /STATUS:TASK qualifier may be necessary in user batch jobs thatrC run tasks where the batch processor must wait for the task to exit E before attempting to execute the next command. For instance, if theRC user batch job includes a command to run a task that writes a file E followed by a command to print that file, the /STATUS:TASK qualifiertD to RUN prevents the PRINT command from being issued before the task has finished writing the file. 2 TASK_NAMEn#TASKs2 TASK# RUN/TASK_NAME:taskname [$]filespecAE The /TASK_NAME qualifier specifies a 1- to 6-character name by whichtB the task is to be referred. The default is set at link-time. This2 qualifier overrides the link-time specification. 2 TIME_LIMIT RUN/TIME_LIMIT:argaN The /TIME_LIMIT qualifier permits you to set a limit on the task's execution M time on Micro/RSX systems. Specify either m and the number of minutes or s d; and the number of seconds of CPU time. The default is 3m.M2 UICS< RUN/UIC:[uic] [$]filespec (for installed tasks)> RUN/UIC:[uic] taskname (for uninstalled tasks)E The /UIC qualifier specifies the default UIC for the task. This taskiD UIC determines into what file-protection class it belongs, and thus! directly influences file access.i) The square brackets are required syntax.x2 DELAY RUN/DELAY:nu tasknameA The /DELAY qualifier runs the specified task after the amount of E time, nu, passes. The argument nu indicates the amount of the delay[F as a number of units. The value n is the number of units and u is one* of the time unit qualifiers, as follows:  TICKS SECONDS MINUTES HOURSI For example, to delay execution for 5 seconds after issuing the command,  /DELAY:5S should be specified.n 2 INTERVAL RUN/INTERVAL:nu tasknamecL The /INTERVAL qualifier runs the specified task at a regular interval. The M argument nu specifies the interval as a number of units of time. The value rO n is the number of units and u is one of the time unit qualifiers, as follows:i TICKS SECONDS MINUTES HOURSD For example, to run a task every 5 seconds, /INTERVAL:5S should be specified.r 2 SCHEDULE RUN/SCHEDULE:hh:mm:ss tasknamerM The /SCHEDULE qualifier runs the specified task at a particular time of day.R 2 SYNCHRONIZEc RUN/SYNCHRONIZE:u tasknamenM The /SYNCHRONIZE qualifier synchronizes the execution of the specified task rH with a particular clock unit. The character u is one of the time unit  qualifiers as follows:u TICKS SECONDS MINUTES HOURSL For example, if you wanted to run task A every hour on the hour, you would  enter the following command:d! RUN/SYNCHRONIZE:H/INTERVAL:1H A:G This command says to synchronize on the hour and then run at intervalsc of 1 hour.d2 INSTALLED_TASK RUN[/qualifier[s]] taskname m /DELAY:nu /INTERVAL:nu  /SCHEDULE:hh:mm:sso /STATUS:arg :COMMAND :TASK  /SYNCHRONIZE:u  /UIC:[uic]q@ This variation of the RUN command initiates the execution of anF installed task. Nonprivileged users can run installed tasks with the= /STATUS qualifier, but all other qualifiers are privileged. L- See HELP RUN qualifier for more information.e hour and then run at intervalsc of 1 hour.d2 INSTALLED_TASK RUN[/qualifier[s]] taskname m /DELAY:nu /INTERVAL:nu  /SCHEDULE:hh:mm:sso /STATUS:arg D The SET QUEUE command modifies attributes given to either print or E batch jobs, or to files that compose jobs in a queue. Such jobs or e? files have been entered in queues by either a PRINT or SUBMIT i8 command. Attributes of active jobs cannot be modified.L A job can be specified as either the combination of a queue name and a job F name, or as a queue entry number. (The entry number for a particular G job can be determined by using the SHOW QUEUE command.) Both the job eC formats and file formats for the command line are described below n1 with the available qualifiers for each format.  p Job formats:u ) SET QUEUE queuename jobname/qualifier[s]i SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/qualifier[s]T /AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm) /[NO]FLAG_PAGE /FORMS:n /JOB_COUNT:n /LENGTH:ns /LOWERCASE /PAGE_COUNT:ne /PRIORITY:no /[NO]RESTART /UPPERCASE File formats: u9 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FILE_POSITION:n/qualifier[s]  W/ SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FILE_POSITION:n/qualifier[s]l o /COPIES:n /[NO]DELETEe: To obtain additional help for a specific qualifier, type: HELP SET QUEUE qualifier S3 AFTERq e4 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm)* SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm) FK The /AFTER qualifier sets a WAITING or HELD queued job to be blocked untilNH after the specified date and time. The job will not be processed at the? time specified, but it will become eligible for processing andSF will compete with other jobs in the queue. This is the equivalent of; issuing the PRINT or SUBMIT command at the time specified.e tH The date defaults to the present day. The time defaults to midnight. IfD only the date or time are specified (but not both), the parenthesesE can be omitted. If both time and date are specified, the parenthesesoE must be included and the date and time must be separated by a space.t3 COPIES 5 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FILE_POSITION:n/COPIES:nr+ SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FILE_POSITION:n/COPIES:nb nF The /COPIES qualifier sets the number of copies of a file you wish to have printed within a job. " See also HELP SET QUEUE JOB_COUNT3 DELETE #NODELETEt 3 NODELETE 7 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FILE_POSITION:n/[NO]DELETEp- SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FILE_POSITION:n/[NO]DELETEa a@ The /[NO]DELETE qualifier changes the delete status of a single( file contained in a print or batch job.3 FILE_POSITIONE q9 SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FILE_POSITION:n/qualifier[s]Y/ SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FILE_POSITION:n/qualifier[s]a iC The /FILE_POSITION qualifier is used for modifying attributes of ahA file within a job rather than attributes of the job itself. TheL? file number n can be determined by examining the files in yournB job with the SHOW QUEUE command. Use the number displayed to the@ left of the file whose attributes you want to change. The onlyE qualifiers which can be used along with /FILE_POSITION are /COPIES:nE and /[NO]DELETE.F _9 See also HELP SET QUEUE COPIES and HELP SET QUEUE DELETEn 3 FLAG_PAGEa #NOFLAG_PAGE3 FORMSO u$ SET QUEUE queuename jobname/FORMS:n SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/FORMS:n t? The /FORMS qualifier changes the physical form number for yourb; print job. An installation can have as many as 256 differ-HF ent forms for different purposes (plain paper, letterhead, tax forms,F etc.). When you specify a form number, the print job will wait in the? queue until a printer with the proper form becomes available. 3 JOB_COUNT  P( SET QUEUE queuename jobname/JOB_COUNT:n SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/JOB_COUNT:n O@ The /JOB_COUNT qualifier sets the number of copies of a job you want to print.e O See also HELP SET QUEUE COPIES.3 LENGTH f% SET QUEUE queuename jobname/LENGTH:na SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/LENGTH:nH eB The /LENGTH qualifier sets the number of lines to be printed on aH page. This number should be less than the actual number of lines on theB form you are printing on. After n lines have been printed on the 9 current page, printing begins on the next physical page.S QE The default is /LENGTH:0 which means that no page ejection will take 9 place unless there are form feed characters in the file.P 3 LOWERCASEP .& SET QUEUE queuename jobname/LOWERCASE SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/LOWERCASE nI The /LOWERCASE qualifier specifies that the print job contains lowercaseeE letters, and therefore must be printed on a printer with a lowercasee character set.o rC This option only selects the proper printer. It does not convert , characters to uppercase.t 3 NOFLAG_PAGES Q* SET QUEUE queuename jobname/[NO]FLAG_PAGE SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/[NO]FLAG_PAGE uI The /[NO]FLAG_PAGE qualifier specifies whether or not you want file flagQD pages to precede each file that is printed. The number of file flagF pages that precede each file is equal to the number of job flag pages that precede the job. uG These file flag pages spell out the full filename of the file in block 9 letters and are a convenient method of separating files.t 3 NORESTARTr#RESTART 3 PAGE_COUNT P) SET QUEUE queuename jobname/PAGE_COUNT:nF SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/PAGE_COUNT:nF _F The /PAGE_COUNT qualifier allows you to specify a page limit for yourC print job. Should your job exceed this limit, it will be aborted.  f: Any flag pages in the job are included in the page count. oF The default is /PAGE_COUNT:0 which means that there is no page limit. 3 PRIORITY ' SET QUEUE queuename jobname/PRIORITY:na SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/PRIORITY:ne aG The /PRIORITY qualifier allows you to change your job's priority. ThisaG priority does not raise or lower the priority of the processor that isEE processing your job; it only affects the position of your job in thebN priority ordered queue. Priorities from 1 to 150 are available for all users.> Priorities from 151 to 250 are reserved for privileged users. GD When the queue manager finishes processing a job, it looks for the F highest priority WAITING job. If there are two WAITING jobs at that H priority, the queue manager selects the job that has been in the queue longest.t o The default is /PRIORITY:50. 3 RESTARTr s( SET QUEUE queuename jobname/[NO]RESTART SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/[NO]RESTART iI The /[NO]RESTART qualifier specifies that if your job is HELD or stopped E for some reason, and then restarted, it will [will not] restart fromr the first file in the job.e 3 UPPERCASEo s& SET QUEUE queuename jobname/UPPERCASE SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/UPPERCASE eG The /UPPERCASE qualifier specifies that the print job does not containtF lower case letters and does not need to be printed on a printer with  lower case characters.Q EB This option only selects the proper printer. It does not convert characters to uppercase. specifies that if your job is HELD or stopped E for some reason, and then restarted, it will [will not] restart fromr the first file in the job.e 3 UPPERCASEo s& SET QUEUE queuename jobname/UPPERCASE SET QUEUE/ENTRY:n/UPPERCASE eG The /UPPERCASE qualifier specifies that the print job does not containtF lower case letterF Here are the short forms of some commonly used DCL commands. You canA use any legal qualifiers with these forms. Although these shorttB forms are not part of the DCL standard, they are provided for theC convenience of Micro/RSX users. Note that we recommend you do notAG use these abbreviations in command files, because they may change fromN" one product release to the next.  * A for ABORT B for BROADCAST C for COPY7 D for DIRECTORY DEAL for DEALLOCATE DEAS for DEASSIGN 7 E for EDIT F for Fortran H for HELPnE ? for HELP L for LINK LO for LOGOUTrA M for MACRO P for PRINT R for RUN," S for SHOW T for TYPEce of Micro/RSX users. Note that we recommend you do notAG use these abbreviations in command files, because they may change fromN" one product release to the next.  * A for ABORT B for BROADCAST C for COPY7 D for DIRECTORY DEAL for DEALLOCATE DEAS for DEASSIGN 7 E for EDIT SHOW thingEE The SHOW command can be used to show something. The following thingsV can be shown with this command:9 ACCOUNTING ASSIGNMENTS CLOCK_QUEUE COMMON [DAY]TIMEtG DEFAULT DEVICES ERROR_LOG LIBRARY PARTITIONS I= PROCESSOR QUEUE SYSTEM TASKS TERMINAL l UIC USERS * The SHOW command can be abbreviated to S.> For further help on the qualifiers, type HELP SHOW qualifier. 2 ACCOUNTING SHOW ACCOUNTING/qualifier /INFORMATION. /TRANSACTIONS[:infile] outfileA The SHOW ACCOUNTING command displays current information on your A terminal session if you are nonprivileged. Privileged users canI0 display information about any terminal session.D The SHOW ACCOUNTING/INFORMATION command displays current accountingC data for a logged-in terminal. A nonprivileged user can only showFA accounting information about his or her own terminal activity. CD The SHOW ACCOUNTING/TRANSACTIONS command dumps the current account-F ing transaction file to the specified output file. The optional inputG file argument can be used to specify a transaction file other than then5 currently active one. This is a privileged command.n 2 ASSIGNMENTSa SHOW ASSIGNMENTS[/qualifier[s]] /GLOBALc /LOCAL /LOGIN /SYSTEMg /TERMINAL:ttnn:nB The SHOW ASSIGNMENTS command displays the local and login logicalG assignments pertaining to your terminal. Privileged users can display > assignments from other terminals and also global assignments.D The /GLOBAL qualifier displays all global, local, and login assign-$ ments throughout the entire system.H The /LOCAL qualifier displays all local assignments and is the default.G The /LOGIN qualifier displays only those login assignments pertaining  to your terminal.2 The /SYSTEM qualifier is synonymous with /GLOBAL.I The /TERMINAL qualifier, when used either alone or with /LOGIN, displaysnG logical assignments pertaining to another terminal. Since /GLOBAL (or E /SYSTEM) displays all assignments throughout the entire system, the 0 combination of it and /TERMINAL is meaningless. 2 CLOCK_QUEUET SHOW CLOCK_QUEUE H The SHOW CLOCK_QUEUE command displays information about tasks currentlyE in the clock queue. The information consists of the task names, theG next time each task is to be run, and each task's reschedule interval,a if one was specified. o2 COMMON_BLOCK_DIRECTORY SHOW COMMON[:name][/TASK]C The SHOW COMMON command displays the names of the resident commonslE installed in the system, their PCB addresses, the number of attachedd% tasks, and the status of the common.UF The optional name argument specifies that information should be dis-H played only for the named common. No common name displays all commons.G The optional /TASK qualifier, when used with a common name, specifies sF that a list of the tasks attached to the named common should also be displayed.O 2 DAYTIMET#TIME 2 DEFAULTO SHOW DEFAULTsL The SHOW DEFAULT command displays the current default device and directory 2 for your terminal along with the terminal number. 2 DEVICESo SHOW DEVICES[:dd][/qualifier] /dd[nn:]i /[NO]PUBLIC /[NO]SYSTEM /WIDTH:ddnn:TI The SHOW DEVICES command displays information about the devices included  in the system.kJ For more information on the qualifiers, type HELP SHOW DEVICES qualifier.3 DDNN:A SHOW DEVICES/dd[nn:]H The /dd[nn:] qualifier displays only a list of the specified device(s). 3 NOPUBLIC#PUBLICo3 PUBLIC- SHOW DEVICES/PUBLIC or SHOW DEVICES/NOPUBLIC[A The /PUBLIC qualifier diplays only a list of the public devices.NE The /NOPUBLIC qualifier displays only a list of the private devices.T 3 NOSYSTEM#SYSTEMo3 SYSTEM- SHOW DEVICES/SYSTEM or SHOW DEVICES/NOSYSTEMiB The /SYSTEM qualifier displays only a list of the public devices.F The /NOSYSTEM qualifier displays only a list of the private devices. 3 WIDTH  SHOW DEVICES WIDTH:ddnn: G The /WIDTH qualifier displays the buffer size of the specified device.C 2 LIBRARYC SHOW LIBRARY[/DIRECTORY]CI The SHOW LIBRARY command displays the current library directory. This isiH the directory where the nonprivileged system utility programs are kept.% The /DIRECTORY qualifier is a no-op.W% See also HELP SHOW SYSTEM DIRECTORY.i@ To run a program from this library, you can type RUN $filename. 2 PARTITIONS SHOW PARTITIONS[:name]eE The SHOW PARTITIONS command displays address and content informationeG about the partitions in the system. The optional partition name can be 7 used to limit the display to one particular partition.sC When all partitions in the system are displayed, the format of ther display is as follows:r& parname pcbaddr baseaddr parsize MAING This display may possibly be followed by one or more lines describing a= the contents of the subpartition, with the following format:S. pcbaddr baseaddr parsize partype contentnameC When only one partition is listed, the format of the display is asn follows:s! PAR=parname:baseaddr:parsize:SYSbH The address and size fields of the single partition display are 32-wordF values, while they are byte values in the multiple partition display. 2 PROCESSORp! SHOW processortype processornameN BATCHp CARD_READER DEVICE INPUTe PRINTER PROCESSORtK The SHOW processortype command displays information about the processors, yN batch processors, printers, card readers, and other devices under the control of the Queue Manager. rN BATCH displays all batch processors. DEVICE and PRINTER display all nonbatch: output processors. CARD_READER and INPUT are synonymous.= SHOW PROCESSOR displays all of the processors in the system.o2 QUEUEs# SHOW QUEUE[/qualifier] [queuename]A /ALL  /BATCH /BRIEF /DEVICE /ENTRY:ns /FILESn /FORMS[:n]a /FULLe /NAME:jobname /OWNER_UIC[:[uic]]e /PRINTERr vJ The SHOW QUEUE command displays information about batch and print jobs in queues. sL A simple SHOW QUEUE command displays all jobs in all queues, including the I files that make up each job. It is comparable to typing SHOW QUEUE/ALL.iI SHOW QUEUE/BATCH displays all of the entries in all of the batch queues. K For more information on the qualifiers (except for /ALL and /BATCH), type  HELP SHOW QUEUE qualifier.  3 BRIEFL#FULL 3 DEVICE#PRINTER3 ENTRYI SHOW QUEUE/ENTRY:nN rH The /ENTRY:n qualifier allows you to specify the unique entry number ofJ the job you wish to display. The entry number is displayed upon success-, ful execution of a PRINT or SUBMIT command. jK When two or more jobs with the same name are in a queue, using /ENTRY:n isa5 the only unambiguous way to refer to a specific job.m3 FILESt#FULLt3 FORMSi! SHOW QUEUE/FORMS[:n] [queuename]y G The /FORMS qualifier restricts the display to print jobs with the sameL forms number as specified in the command. This can be useful to determine @ how many jobs preceding your job require the same special form. tC If :n is omitted, the display shows all jobs that are not FORMS:0.B3 FULL SHOW QUEUE/BRIEF [queuename]w SHOW QUEUE/FILES [queuename]e SHOW QUEUE/FULL [queuename] nK There are three formats in which queues (and the jobs in them) can be dis-O; played. They are listed in order of least to most detail.t tL The /BRIEF format displays only queues, queue assignments, and jobs in the  queues. sK The /FILES format displays queues, queue assignments, jobs in queues, and aJ files that comprise those jobs. This is the default format used by SHOW  QUEUE.S BM The /FULL format displays the most information. It displays the attributes OK of the jobs in the queues and those of the files that comprise the jobs. h; The qualifier also displays queues and queue assignments. d o3 NAME$ SHOW QUEUE/NAME:jobname [queuename] dK The /NAME qualifier allows you to display only jobs with the specified job/J name. The directory of the job is part of the name. You do not have to ( specify it if it is your own directory. aJ If there are multiple jobs in the queue with the same directory and name L specified, all of them will be displayed. If this is not desired, use the 1 /ENTRY:n qualifier (see HELP SHOW QUEUE ENTRY). a 3 OWNER_UICp) SHOW QUEUE/OWNER_UIC[:[uic]] [queuename]  EL The /OWNER_UIC qualifier displays the jobs of a specific UIC. The default  UIC is your login UIC.h pL If you are interested in displaying only your own jobs, you should use the L /OWNER_UIC qualifier because the SHOW QUEUE command defaults to displaying all jobs. q@ The UIC should appear with square brackets in the format [g,m]. 3 PRINTERe SHOW QUEUE/PRINTER [queuename]h SHOW QUEUE/DEVICE [queuename] HM The /PRINTER and /DEVICE qualifiers display all of the nonbatch queues. The qualifiers are synonymous. 2 ERROR_LOGb @DCLSHOWEL2 SYSTEM SHOW SYSTEM[/qualifier[s]]g /CLI /CRASH_DEVICE /DIRECTORY  /EXTENSION_LIMIT /PACKETS /POOLe /SECONDARY_POOLm dG The SHOW SYSTEM command displays information about the current system.aL For further information on the qualifiers, type HELP SHOW SYSTEM qualifier.3 CRASH_DEVICE SHOW SYSTEM/CRASH_DEVICER EF The /CRASH_DEVICE qualifier displays the crash device for the system. 3 PACKETSy SHOW SYSTEM/PACKETSG Normally, some number of 18-word I/O packets are set aside in pool and I retained in a separate queue for use by the QIO$ directive. This numberPG of packets (refered to as MAXPKT) is used to optimize the servicing ofd QIO requests.L The SHOW SYSTEM/PACKETS command displays the maximum number and the current/ number of available I/O packets in the format:E MAXPKT=m.:c.E where m is the maximum number of available I/O packets and c is the r) current number of available I/O packets.C3 CLIN SHOW SYSTEM/CLIL The /CLI qualifier displays information about the command line interpreters currently on the system.e 3 DIRECTORYm SHOW SYSTEM/DIRECTORYJ The SHOW SYSTEM/DIRECTORY command displays the current system directory. L This is the directory where the system image and privileged system utility  programs are kept.p@ To run a program from this library, you can type RUN $filename.3 POOL SHOW SYSTEM/POOLtG The SHOW SYSTEM/POOL command displays the current status of the systemOG dynamic pool as three numbers, top:max:total, where top is the currentdF top of memory, max is the largest contiguous block of pool in 64(10)-L byte blocks, and total is the total amount of pool in 64(10)-byte blocks. 3 EXTENSION_LIMIT  SHOW SYSTEM/EXTENSION_LIMITM The SHOW SYSTEM/EXTENSION_LIMIT command displays the maximum size to which aaN task can extend itself by means of the EXTEND TASK (EXTK$) system directive. 3 SECONDARY_POOL SHOW SYSTEM/SECONDARY_POOLeM The SHOW SYSTEM/SECONDARY_POOL command displays information about secondary p/ pool. The display is in the following format:e SECPOL=lrg:tot:pctpJ where lrg is the size of the largest block of available secondary pool inM 32(10)-word blocks, tot is the total amount of free space in secondary pool A in 32(10)-word blocks, and pct is the percentage of pool in use.a2 TASKS " SHOW TASKS[:taskname]/qualfier[s] /ACTIVE[:ttnn:] /DEVICE:ddnn:S /INSTALLED /LOGICAL_UNITSN The SHOW TASKS command displays information about active and installed tasks.6 For more information, type HELP SHOW TASKS qualifier.3 ACTIVE2 SHOW TASKS[:taskname][/qualifier]/ACTIVE[:ttnn:]  [/BRIEF] /FULL /ALLa mL With the /BRIEF qualififier, which is the default, SHOW TASKS/ACTIVE lists N the names of tasks active on your terminal. The ttnn: argument specifies thatM it is the list of tasks active on another terminal that should be displayed. K The /ALL qualifier specifies that a list of all active tasks in the systemn be displayed.  O The /FULL qualifier displays a detailed list of the disposition of all of the tM active tasks in the system. The optional task name allows you to show this information for a single task. 3 DEVICE# SHOW TASKS[:taskname]/DEVICE:ddnn:i N The /DEVICE qualifier displays the tasks installed from the specified device. 3 INSTALLEDs, SHOW TASKS[:taskname]/INSTALLED[/qualifier] /BRIEFy /FULLF The brief format of the SHOW TASKS/INSTALLED command displays a short: format list of all of the installed tasks in the system. H The full format of the SHOW TASKS/INSTALLED command displays a detailedE list of the disposition of all of the installed tasks in the system.l3 LOGICAL_UNITSE" SHOW TASK:taskname/LOGICAL_UNITS M The SHOW TASK/LOGICAL_UNITS command displays the static logical unit number v) (LUN) assignments for an installed task.] 2 TERMINAL" SHOW TERMINAL[:ttnn:][/qualifier]H The SHOW TERMINAL command displays information about your terminal and  other terminals on the system.dL The SHOW TERMINAL command without any qualifier shows all the attributes ofH your terminal. If you name another terminal in the command, all of its attributes are displayed.C For a list of the commonly used attributes, see HELP SHOW TERMINALU COMMON_USE.D For a list of the terminal setup attributes, see HELP SHOW TERMINAL TERMINAL_SETUP.E The task setup attributes are attributes that may need to be set fordB certain user tasks to execute properly. For a list of task setup/ attributes, see HELP SHOW TERMINAL TASK_SETUP.tH For more information on a particular attribute, type HELP SHOW TERMINAL attribute. 3 NOADVANCED_VIDEO#ADVANCED_VIDEO 3 ADVANCED_VIDEO? SHOW TERMINAL/ADVANCED_VIDEO or SHOW TERMINAL/NOADVANCED_VIDEOAI This command displays a list of all VT100-series terminals that have (orO( do not have) the advanced video option. 3 NOANSI_CRT #ANSI_CRTu 3 ANSI_CRT3 SHOW TERMINAL/ANSI_CRT or SHOW TERMINAL/NOANSI_CRTpJ This command displays a list of all terminals whose output is (or is not)L a subset of the ANSI standard. Terminals with this attribute do not output" DIGITAL private escape sequences. 3 NOAUTOBAUD #AUTOBAUDD 3 AUTOBAUD3 SHOW TERMINAL/AUTOBAUD or SHOW TERMINAL/NOAUTOBAUDVI This command displays a list of all terminals that have (or do not have)h5 autobaud detection on a remote dial-up line enabled.3 NOBLOCK_MODE #BLOCK_MODEN 3 BLOCK_MODE7 SHOW TERMINAL/BLOCK_MODE or SHOW TERMINAL/NOBLOCK_MODEoL This command displays a list of all terminals that are (or are not) capable. of local editing and block-mode transmission. 3 NOBROADCAST #BROADCAST 3 BROADCASTe5 SHOW TERMINAL/BROADCAST or SHOW TERMINAL/NOBROADCAST F This command lists all terminals on the system that accept (or do not- accept) messages from the BROADCAST command.e 3 NODEC_CRTe#DEC_CRT 3 DEC_CRTi1 SHOW TERMINAL/DEC_CRT or SHOW TERMINAL/NODEC_CRTNE This command displays a list of all terminals that are (or are not) 6 upward-compatible with the VT100 series of terminals. 3 NOEDIT_MODEp #EDIT_MODE 3 EDIT_MODEn5 SHOW TERMINAL/EDIT_MODE or SHOW TERMINAL/NOEDIT_MODETK This command displays a list of all terminals that can (or cannot) perform K ANSI-defined advanced editing functions. An example of such a terminal iss the VT102.e 3 COMMON_USE SHOW TERMINAL/characteristicH The following keywords show terminal characteristics that are regularlyH needed by the average terminal user. For more information on a particu-< lar characteristic, type HELP SHOW TERMINAL characteristic.? /BROADCAST /CLI /DCL /HOLD_SCREEN /= /HT /LOGGED_ON /LOWERCASE /PRIVILEGE tC /SPEED /TI: /TT /UPPERCASE /VT:s3 CLIm SHOW TERMINAL/CLI iH The SHOW TERMINAL/CLI command displays the command line interpreter for the terminal. See also HELP SHOW SYSTEM CLI.t 3 NOCONTROL=Cn #CONTROL=C 3 CONTROL=Ci5 SHOW TERMINAL/CONTROL=C or SHOW TERMINAL/NOCONTROL=CaL This command displays a list of all terminals on which typing CTRL/C causesH either an abort (/CONTROL=C) or an explicit DCL> prompt (/NOCONTROL=C).3 DCL  SHOW TERMINAL/DCLF The SHOW TERMINAL/DCL command displays a list of the DCL terminals in the system. ! See also HELP SHOW SYSTEM CLI. c 3 LOGGED_ON  SHOW TERMINAL/LOGGED_ONI This command displays a list of all the terminals currently logged in on the system.3 ECHO#NOECHOE 3 EIGHT_BITL #NOEIGHT_BIT3 ESCAPE #NOESCAPE 3 FORM_FEED #NOFORM_FEED 3 FULL_DUPLEXa#NOFULL_DUPLEX 3 HARDCOPY#SCOPE3 CRFILL SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/CRFILLtH The SHOW TERMINAL/CRFILL command displays the number of horizontal fillH characters generated for your terminal. A privileged user can show theE number of horizontal fill characters for any terminal in the system.GJ Horizontal fill characters are null characters sent to the terminal afterK a carriage return to accommodate the different return speeds of different EM terminal models. Many terminal models perform a mechanical carriage return DK slow enough that the next n characters sent to the terminal will be lost. C8 Adding in null characters prevents this from happening. 3 HOLD_SCREEN #NOHOLD_SCREEN 3 INTERACTIVEd#PASSALL3 LOCAL#REMOTEf 3 LOWERCASEi #UPPERCASE 3 NOPARITY#PARITY 3 PARITY/ SHOW TERMINAL/PARITY or SHOW TERMINAL/NOPARITYtI This command displays a list of all terminals that have (or do not have)nI parity generation and checking enabled. Parity checking is used to ver-fD ify the transmission of data between the terminal and the computer.3 MODELt SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/MODELE The SHOW TERMINAL/MODEL command shows you what model of terminal theEE system thinks you are using. If this information is not correct, youEG should correct it with the SET TERMINAL command. Some system tasks use - this information, so it should be correct. p3 NOECHO+ SHOW TERMINAL/ECHO or SHOW TERMINAL/NOECHOE The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]ECHO command lists the terminals in the systemfF that are set (or not set) to echo input typed on them. Most terminals will be set to echo.N 3 NOEIGHT_BIT5 SHOW TERMINAL/EIGHT_BIT or SHOW TERMINAL/NOEIGHT_BIT C The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]EIGHT_BIT command lists the terminals in then4 system that are set (or not set) to eight-bit mode.C /NOEIGHT_BIT is the default. DEC software employs seven-bit ASCIIe (without parity checking).OC /EIGHT_BIT allows the terminal to pass all eight bits of the ASCII H characters. This attribute is used when a teminal is communicating with( some device that sends eight-bit ASCII.A The mnemonic EBC, used in the output, means Eight Bit Character. 3 NOESCAPE/ SHOW TERMINAL/ESCAPE or SHOW TERMINAL/NOESCAPEcG The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]ESCAPE command lists the terminals in the systemgB that are set (or not set) to recognize terminal escape sequences. 3 NOFORM_FEED5 SHOW TERMINAL/FORM_FEED or SHOW TERMINAL/NOFORM_FEEDtC The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]FORM_FEED command lists the terminals in thet8 system that do (or do not) support hardware form feeds.3 NOFULL_DUPLEX-9 SHOW TERMINAL/FULL_DUPLEX or SHOW TERMINAL/NOFULL_DUPLEXEH The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]FULL_DUPLEX command lists the terminals that haveJ full-duplex mode enabled or (disabled). Full-duplex mode means that the H terminal can accept input and receive output at the same time. The de-2 fault is /NOFULL_DUPLEX (that is, "half-duplex"). 3 NOHARDCOPY#SCOPE3 NOHOLD_SCREENM9 SHOW TERMINAL/HOLD_SCREEN or SHOW TERMINAL/NOHOLD_SCREENsE The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]HOLD_SCREEN command lists the terminals in theG system that are (or are not) in hold-screen mode. Hold-screen mode is EF a mode supported by some CRT terminals in which text is presented one page at a time.3 NOINTERACTIVEd#PASSALL 3 NOLOCAL #REMOTEr 3 NOLOWERCASEt #UPPERCASE 3 NOPASSALL #PASSALL3 NOPRIVILEGED #PRIVILEGEDN 3 NOREMOTE#REMOTE, 3 NOSCOPEe#SCOPE 3 NOSERIAL#SERIAL 3 NOSLAVER#SLAVE3 NOTABN#TAB 3 NOTYPEAHEADW #TYPEAHEAD 3 NOUPPERCASE #UPPERCASE3 NOWRAP#WRAPC 3 PAGE_LENGTHs" SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/PAGE_LENGTHJ The SHOW TERMINAL/PAGE_LENGTH command shows the number of lines per page I on your terminal. Privileged users can show the page length of any ter- minal in the system.AM The page length on a CRT terminal is usually considered to be the number of O lines on the screen.N 3 PASSALL5 SHOW TERMINAL/PASSALL or SHOW TERMINAL/NOINTERACTIVEO5 SHOW TERMINAL/NOPASSALL or SHOW TERMINAL/INTERACTIVEDJ These commands list the terminals in the system that are (or are not) in  read-pass-all mode.E /NOPASSALL is the default and means that any characters typed on thep1 terminal are interpreted by the terminal driver. I /PASSALL means that characters typed on the terminal are passed directly G to the requesting task, without interpretation by the terminal driver.c< The mnemonic RPA, used in the display, means Read Pass All. 3 PRIVILEGED5 SHOW TERMINAL/PRIVILEGE or SHOW TERMINAL/NOPRIVILEGEH The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]PRIVILEGE command lists all of the privileged (orJ nonprivileged) terminals in the system. A privileged terminal can issue  any DCL command.p 3 NOREGISr#REGIS3 REGISt- SHOW TERMINAL/REGIS or SHOW TERMINAL/NOREGISaF This command displays a list of all terminals that support (or do notI support) the Regis graphics set. VT125s and VT240s can support the set.e3 REMOTE. SHOW TERMINAL/LOCAL or SHOW TERMINAL/NOREMOTE. SHOW TERMINAL/NOLOCAL or SHOW TERMINAL/REMOTEF These commands list the terminals in the system that are (or are not) on remote (dial-up) lines. 3 SCOPEe0 SHOW TERMINAL/HARDCOPY or SHOW TERMINAL/NOSCOPE0 SHOW TERMINAL/NOHARDCOPY or SHOW TERMINAL/SCOPEF These commands list the terminals in the system that are (or are not) hardcopy terminals.3 SERIAL/ SHOW TERMINAL/SERIAL or SHOW TERMINAL/NOSERIALTI This command displays a list of all terminals on which only one task can/K run at a time (/SERIAL; the default) or on which multiple tasks can run at  the same time (/NOSERIAL).t3 SLAVE - SHOW TERMINAL/SLAVE or SHOW TERMINAL/NOSLAVE F The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]SLAVE command lists the terminals in the systemI that are (or are not) slaved. A slaved terminal is one that cannot issue I any unsolicited input. In general, this means that a slaved terminal mayEH not issue any DCL commands. A terminal is usually slaved while runningJ a task so that the terminal can be left unattended without any fear of it) being used to gain access to the system.a3 NOSOFT_CHARACTERSS#SOFT_CHARACTERS3 SOFT_CHARACTERSSA SHOW TERMINAL/SOFT_CHARACTERS or SHOW TERMINAL/NOSOFT_CHARACTERSaF This command displays a list of the terminals that accept (or do not E accept) software-defined character sets. The VT200-series terminalsr accept these sets. 3 SPEEDi SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/SPEEDF The SHOW TERMINAL/SPEED command lists the transmit and receive speedsF of your terminal. Privileged users can show the transmit and receive& speeds of any terminal in the system.B The first of the two numbers displayed is the terminal's transmitH speed. The second is its receive speed. Normally, both of these will beH the same speed, but Micro/RSX also supports split speed terminals (ter-I minals with different transmit and receive speeds). The /SPEED setting EJ must match the speed set on the hardware switches on the terminal itself.3 TABi) SHOW TERMINAL/TAB or SHOW TERMINAL/NOTABrI The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]TAB command lists the terminals in the system thattK do (or do not) support hardware horizontal tabs. If your terminal does notmF support these, the terminal driver replaces tabs with the appropriate number of spaces.F The mnemonic HHT, used in the display, means Hardware Horizontal Tab.3 WIDTHa SHOW TERMINAL/WIDTH .H This command displays the width for your terminal, that is, the maximumF length a line can be on the terminal. The width of most terminals is set at 80 characters.> The abbreviation BUF, used in the display, means Buffer size. 3 TASK_SETUP SHOW TERMINAL/attributeH The following keywords show terminal characteristics that can be neededJ by system or user tasks. Most system tasks that require these attributes H will set the attributes when they attach the terminal. User tasks can I also do this. For more information on a particular attribute, type HELPm SHOW TERMINAL keyword.nD /ECHO /EIGHT_BIT /ESCAPE /FULL_DUPLEX /INTERACTIVE? /LOCAL /PARITY /PASSALL /REMOTE /SERIALs" /SLAVE /TYPEAHEAD /WRAP3 TERMINAL_SETUP SHOW TERMINAL/attributeI The following keywords relate to hardware characteristics of a terminal.eH Most of these keywords will cause a list of all terminals in the systemI with the specified characteristic to be displayed. However, some attri-nJ butes (for example, CRFILL, MODEL, PAGE_LENGTH, and LFFILL) will display * only the value relating to your terminal.A /ASR33 /ASR35 /KSR33 /KSR35 /LA12 /LA24 /LA30P A /LA30S /LA34 /LA36 /LA38 /LA50 /LA100 /LA120PA /LA180S /VT05 /VT50 /VT52 /VT55 /VT61 /VT100dH /VT101 /VT102 /VT105 /VT125 /VT131 /VT132 /VT200_SERIESK /ADVANCED_VIDEO /ANSI_CRT /AUTOBAUD /BLOCK_MODE /CONTROL=CdJ /CRFILL /DEC_CRT /EDIT_MODE /FORM_FEED /HARDCOPYN /LFFILL /MODEL /PAGE_LENGTH /REGIS /SCOPE 7 /SOFT_CHARACTERS /SPEED /TAB /WIDTH L For further information on these keywords, type HELP SHOW TERMINAL keyword.3 HT#VT:3 TI:T#VT:3 TT#VT:3 VT:  SHOW TERMINAL/qualifier /HT  /TI: /TTE /VT:J These commands display lists of various kinds of terminals on the system.6 The /HT qualifier displays all DECnet host terminals.E The /TI: qualifier displays your own terminal. This is the default.C 3 The /TT qualifier displays all hardware terminals. 3 The /VT: qualifier displays all virtual terminals.s 3 TYPEAHEADW5 SHOW TERMINAL/TYPEAHEAD or SHOW TERMINAL/NOTYPEAHEADVJ The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]TYPEAHEAD command lists the terminals in the systemI that do (or do not) have their typeahead buffers enabled. The typeaheadvF buffer is 36 characters long and holds characters when they are typed( faster than they are accepted as input. 3 UPPERCASEs5 SHOW TERMINAL/LOWERCASE or SHOW TERMINAL/NOUPPERCASET5 SHOW TERMINAL/NOLOWERCASE or SHOW TERMINAL/UPPERCASE D These commands list the terminals in the system that do (or do not)C support lowercase. On terminals that do not have this attribute, TE lowercase characters are converted to uppercase before they are sent) to the terminal.a3 LFFILL/ SHOW TERMINAL/LFFILL or SHOW TERMINAL/NOLFFILLlG The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]LFFILL command lists the terminals in the systemdE that do (or do not) require vertical fill characters. Vertical fillOD characters are used to accommodate terminals that cannot accept newH data characters immediately after performing a vertical tab, line feed, or form feed. 3 ASR33l#VT61d3 KSR33e#VT61t3 ASR35T#VT61r3 KSR35a#VT61r3 LA12#VT61u3 LA24#VT61 3 LA30Ps#VT61t3 LA30Sm#VT613 LA34#VT61O3 LA36#VT61L3 LA38#VT61N3 LA50#VT613 LA100 #VT61L3 LA120L#VT61n3 LA180S#VT61n3 VT05#VT61e3 VT50#VT61r3 VT52#VT61e3 VT55#VT61c3 VT100.#VT61c3 VT101#VT61t3 VT102s#VT61c3 VT105 #VT61l3 VT125n#VT61e3 VT131d#VT61r3 VT132m#VT61y3 VT200_SERIES#VT61t3 VT61$ SHOW TERMINAL[:ddnn:]/terminalmodelI The SHOW TERMINAL/terminalmodel command displays a list of all terminalsVF on your system of a particular model, including any of the following:A /ASR33 /ASR35 /KSR33 /KSR35 /LA12 /LA24 /LA30P A /LA30S /LA34 /LA36 /LA38 /LA50 /LA100 /LA120 A /LA180S /VT05 /VT50 /VT52 /VT55 /VT61 /VT100 H /VT101 /VT102 /VT105 /VT125 /VT131 /VT132 /VT200_SERIESE Certain system tasks, and possibly some user tasks, make use of thisiH terminal model information, so it is a good idea to make sure that the  information is correct.3 WRAP+ SHOW TERMINAL/WRAP or SHOW TERMINAL/NOWRAPnE The SHOW TERMINAL/[NO]WRAP command lists the terminals in the systemI that are set (or not set) to wrap around at the end of the line. If theSG terminal is set to wrap, the terminal driver issues a carriage-return/TG line-feed pair when you type up to whatever line width the terminal issJ set for. If wrap is not set, no carriage-return/line-feed pair is issued.2 TIME SHOW DAY[TIME] or SHOW TIMEJ The SHOW DAYTIME command displays the current time and date. The time is: in 24-hour format and the date is formatted as dd-mmm-yy.2 UIC SHOW UICnI The SHOW UIC command displays the UIC. The command works only in named-e directory mode (the default).2 USERSe SHOW USERS C The SHOW USERS command displays the currently logged-in terminals,rF including DECnet host and virtual terminals. Also displayed are the 4 default directory and login UIC for each terminal. J On Micro/RSX systems, if accounting is supported and running, subsequent M columns of the display show the date and time of login, the number of tasks > active on the terminal, and the name of the person logged in. The command works only in named-e directory mode (the default).2 USERSe SHOW USERS C The SHOW USERS command displays the currently logged-in terminals,rF including DECnet host and virtual terminals. Also displayed are the 4 default directory and login UIC for each terminal. J On Micro/RSX systems, if accounting is supported and running, subsequent M columns of the display show the date and time of login, the number of tasks > active on the terminal, and the name of the" START[/TERMINAL:ttnn:] [taskname]F The START command resumes execution of a task that was stopped by theG STOP$S directive. Note that starting a stopped task is different fromU continuing a suspended one.F The taskname specifies the name of the task you want to start. If a G taskname is not specified, the task that was running at your terminal A8 (and that was initiated by the RUN command) is started.D The /TERMINAL qualifier allows a privileged user to start a stopped. task that is running on some other terminal. E For information about starting queues and processors, see HELP STARTeE QUEUE or HELP START PROCESSOR. For information about starting erroreE logging, see HELP START ERROR_LOG. For information about starting a ' blocked task, see HELP START UNBLOCK. 2 QUEUEm #PROCESSOR 2 PROCESSORa START/QUEUE queuename START/QUEUE/MANAGER1 START/processortype processorname[/qualifier[s]]) APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR /ALIGNd* BATCH_PROCESSOR /FORMS:n CARD_READER /CONTINUE DEVICE /NEXT INPUT /BACKSPACE:nL* PRINTER /FORWARDSPACE:n PROCESSOR /RESTARTr /TOP_OF_FILE /PAGE:nr  n? The START/QUEUE and START/PROCESSOR commands start a queue or SA processor that was stopped with the STOP/QUEUE or STOP/PROCESSORS commands. y= The START/QUEUE/MANAGER command starts up the queue manager. C For more information, type HELP START PROCESSOR qualifier and HELPE0 START QUEUE MANAGER. See also HELP STOP QUEUE. 3 ALIGN  ( START/processortype processorname/ALIGN OC The /ALIGN qualifier clears the internal line counter in the printIF processor, and informs the processor that the paper has been aligned.2 This is necessary for special character handling. aC This qualifier is useful when a paper fault occurs and you need to2 adjust the position of the paper in the printer.  n@ You do not need to specify the /ALIGN qualifier when you changeE the forms in a printer because the alignment at the top of the form is assumed.3 PAGE e) START/processortype processorname/PAGE:nf C The /PAGE qualifier specifies that printing is to continue at pagemC n in the current file. In order to use this qualifier, a file mustf3 have been printing when the processor was stopped.s 3 BACKSPACEa p. START/processortype processorname/BACKSPACE:n iB The /BACKSPACE qualifier specifies that printing is to continue nB pages back in the current file. In order to use this qualifier, a= file must have been printing when the processor was stopped.e SD This qualifier is useful when there is a paper fault in the printer3 and one or more pages of the job have been ruined.h 3 CONTINUE + START/processortype processorname/CONTINUE vD The /CONTINUE qualifier specifies that the processor is to continue; printing where it left off. This is the default condition.P3 FORMSe* START/processortype processorname/FORMS:n g= The /FORMS qualifier specifies the physical form type in the< printer being restarted. An installation may have up to 256C different physical forms used for different jobs. For example, onei@ might have normal 11 1/2 x 14 7/8 paper for reports and generalB output, along with special forms for paychecks, invoices, federalB tax forms, etc. Each of these forms is given a number to identify@ it. For information on setting up special forms, please see the" Micro/RSX System Manager's Guide. R> The Queue Manager will only dequeue a job to a printer if the? form number of the form in the printer matches the form numberoA requested by the print job. Therefore, many jobs using a varietyeE of forms may reside in a queue at the same time, but only those withl; a certain form number will print on the assigned printer. f rD When this qualifier is used, the processor will start with the next& job that has a matching forms number.3 FORWARDSPACE s1 START/processortype processorname/FORWARDSPACE:ne eC The /FORWARDSPACE qualifier specifies that printing is to continueoC n pages ahead in the current file. In order to use this qualifier, ? a file must have been printing when the processor was stopped.e 3 MANAGERu  START/QUEUE/MANAGER yG The START/QUEUE/MANAGER command starts up the queue manager. This mustfB be done before any other queue manager commands are issued. This 7 command is usually in the system startup command file.S3 NEXT S' START/processortype processorname/NEXTP :D The /NEXT qualifier specifies that printing is to continue with theM next available job in the queue. The job that is currently printing is held.a 3 RESTARTh * START/processortype processorname/RESTART ? The /RESTART qualifier specifies that printing continue at theRB beginning of the current job. Unless the job was submitted with aG matching /RESTART qualifier, files from the job that have already beent) completely printed will not be repeated.S 3 TOP_OF_FILEs y. START/processortype processorname/TOP_OF_FILE eE The /TOP_OF_FILE qualifier specifies that printing is to continue ate6 the beginning of the file that is currently printing. 2 ERROR_LOG @DCLSTRTEL 2 UNBLOCKo* START/UNBLOCK[/TERMINAL:ttnn:] [taskname]@ START/UNBLOCK continues the execution of a task blocked by the G STOP/BLOCK command. Nonprivileged users can unblock any task running rB from their terminal. Privileged users can unblock a task at any ) terminal, using the terminal qualifier. START/processortype processorname/TOP_OF_FILE e' STOP/BLOCK[/TERMINAL:ttnn:] [taskname]rF The STOP/BLOCK command blocks an installed running task. The task noA longer executes or competes for memory. Nonprivileged users cancD block tasks running from their own terminals. Privileged users can block any task. hC The taskname defaults to a task named after the terminal, such as u TT10:.aG Privileged users on Micro/RSX systems can use the /TERMINAL qualifier _- to block a task running on another terminal.r6 There is no simple STOP command on Micro/RSX systems. For more information, see:L= HELP STOP ABORT !stops current job on line printern) HELP STOP QUEUE !stops a queuei> HELP STOP PROCESSOR !stops batch processor, card-reader2 !processor, and printer/ HELP STOP ERROR_LOG !stops error loggingi2 QUEUE #PROCESSOR 2 PROCESSORe STOP/QUEUE queuenames STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER[/ABORT]q0 STOP/processortype processorname[/qualifier[s]]( APPLICATIONS_PROCESSOR /ABORT$ BATCH_PROCESSOR /FILE_END CARD_READER /JOB_ENDP DEVICE /PAUSEn INPUT PRINTERH PROCESSOR > The STOP/QUEUE stops a queue. Jobs may no longer be dequeued from this queue.  D The STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER command shuts down the queue manager and allF known processors. Any active jobs are allowed to complete before the? shutdown. STOP/QUEUE/MANAGER/ABORT does the same, except that D any active jobs are aborted and held rather than allowed to finish. @ The STOP/PROCESSOR command stops a print, batch, card reader or applications processor.C For more information, type HELP STOP PROCESSOR qualifier. See alsop HELP START QUEUE. n3 ABORTb' STOP/processortype processorname/ABORTS /@ The /ABORT qualifier stops the processor immediately and abortsJ the active job (if any) running on it. An aborted print job is HELD. An N aborted batch job submitted with the /RESTART qualifier is HELD. An aborted > batch job submitted with the /NORESTART qualifier is deleted. OJ Privileged users can abort any job; nonprivileged users can delete their own jobs. mC You can also delete the active job on a Card Reader processor withU this command. 3 FILE_END* STOP/processortype processorname/FILE_END u= The /FILE_END qualifier stops the processor when it finishes  processing the current file. 3 JOB_ENDt b) STOP/processortype processorname/JOB_ENDd tH The /JOB_END qualifier stops the processor when it finishes processing  the current job.i rH This is often useful when changing forms in printers. You can stop the F print processor using the /JOB_END qualifier, change the forms in theD printer, and then restart the processor using the /FORMS qualifier.3 PAUSEp r) STOP/processortype processorname[/PAUSE]a iD The /PAUSE qualifier stops the processor immediately and remembers 7 the position in the current file. This is the default._ 2 ERROR_LOGe @DCLSTOPEL2 ABORTt STOP/ABORT printer[:]B Stops the current job on a line printer immediately. Privileged F users can stop any job. Nonprivileged users can stop their own jobs.ng the /JOB_END qualifier, change the forms in theD printer, and then restart the processor using the /FORMS qualifier.3 PAUSEp r) STOP/processortype processorname[/PAUSE]a iD The /PAUSE qualifier stops the processor immediately and remembers 7 the position in the current file. This is the default._ 2 ERROR_LOGe @DCLSTOPEL2 ABORTt STOP/ABORT printer[:]B Stops the current job on a "SUBMIT[/qualifier[s]] filespec[s] " /AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm)  /[NO]DELETE /[NO]HOLD /[NO]LOG_FILE /NAME:jobname /[NO]PRINTER[:queuename]a /PRIORITY:n /QUEUE:queuenamet /[NO]RESTART t /[NO]TRANSFERFThe SUBMIT command submits one or more files for processing on a batchAprocessor. The files are grouped together into a single batch jobt:and are executed one after the other without interruption.AFor additional information, type HELP SUBMIT qualifier. See also AHELP STOP ABORT for information about stopping the current job onDa line printer._2 AFTER *SUBMIT/AFTER:(dd-mmm-yy hh:mm) filespec[s]DThe /AFTER qualifier delays the processing of your job until after aAspecified date and time. The job will not run immediately at thatoDtime, but will become eligible to be processed, competing with otherjobs at that time. DYou may specify either the date, or the time, or both. If you do not.specify a date, the current date is assumed. Examples:eA$ SUBMIT/AFTER:(18:00) BIGFILE.BAT !process the file after 6 pmbG$ SUBMIT/AFTER:(1-APR-82) JOKE.BAT !process the file on April 1, 1982] 2 NODELETE#DELETEi2 DELETESUBMIT/[NO]DELETE filespec[s]lSUBMIT filespec[s]/[NO]DELETEmBThe /DELETE qualifier deletes the specified file after processing.B/[NO]DELETE is both a command and a file qualifier. The default is /NODELETE. cAIn the following example, only FILE2 is deleted after processing,a-$ SUBMIT FILE1.BAT,FILE2.BAT/DELETE,FILE3.BAT1In the next example, FILE1 and FILE2 are deleted.i8$ SUBMIT/DELETE FILE1.BAT, FILE2.BAT, FILE3.BAT/NODELETE2 NOHOLD#HOLDp2 HOLDSUBMIT/[NO]HOLD filespec[s]EAThe /HOLD qualifier makes your job ineligible for printing. This@qualifier has the same effect as the HOLD command. You must thenEenter the RELEASE command to allow your job to be processed. /NOHOLDis the default. See HELP RELEASE.e 2 NOLOG_FILE #LOG_FILEf 2 LOG_FILESUBMIT/[NO]LOG_FILE filespec[s]TFThe /[NO]LOG_FILE qualifier specifies whether or not a log file of theBjob should be generated. The log file tracks all the action in the%batch job. The default is /LOG_FILE. e 2 NOPRINTERh#PRINTER 2 PRINTEReSUBMIT/[NO]PRINTER filespec[s]$SUBMIT/PRINTER:queuename filespec[s]AThe /[NO]PRINTER qualifier specifies whether or not the batch logaFshould be printed. If you specify /NOPRINTER, the logfile will not beDprinted, but rather, will be placed in your directory. All output of@the batch job not contained in the batch log file (spooled MACRO8listings, etc.) will be printed as separate print jobs. PIf you specify /PRINTER, the logfile will be queued to be printed. All output ofJthe batch job not contained in the batch log file (spooled MACRO listings,Metc.) will be attached to the batch log and printed with it as a single printcjob.MIf you want your batch log to go to a queue other than PRINT, you can specify,(another queue on the /PRINTER qualifier.The default is /PRINTER:PRINT. 2 PRIORITYSUBMIT/PRIORITY:n filespec[s]dLThe /PRIORITY qualifier allows you to specify a priority for your batch job.LThis priority does not specify the priority at which the batch job actually <runs, but is simply used to determine position in the queue.KPrivileged users may specify any priority between 1 and 250. Non-privilegedr4users may only specify priorities between 1 and 150.EThe default is /PRIORITY:50. /PRIORITY:0 is the same as /PRIORITY:50.l 2 NORESTART #RESTART 2 RESTARTRSUBMIT/[NO]RESTART filespec[s]EThe /[NO]RESTART qualifier specifies whether or not your job is to bei3restarted from the beginning if it is interrupted. yLWhen you specify /RESTART, if your job is stopped for some reason, and then 7restarted, it will start over again from the beginning.iJWhen you specify /NORESTART, the default, if your job is stopped for some ,reason, and then restarted, it will be held. 2 TRANSFER #NOTRANSFERi 2 NOTRANSFERSUBMIT/[NO]TRANSFER filespec[s]SFThe /[NO]TRANSFER qualifier specifies whether or not the system shouldDmake temporary copies of batch command files submitted from a volumeBon a private device. The default is /TRANSFER. This permits you toCdismount the volume and deallocate the device as soon as the promptt"returns after the SUBMIT command. FIf you specify /NOTRANSFER, no copies will be made, and you must keep Gthe volume mounted and the device allocated until the batch processing is complete.2 QUEUEO"SUBMIT/QUEUE:queuename filespec[s]GThis qualifier allows you to submit your job to a queue other than the ydefault BATCH.2 NAMESUBMIT/NAME:jobname filespec[s]nGThis qualifier allows you to give your print job a name. The job name tDis 1 - 9 characters. If you do not specify a job name, the name of "the first file in the job is used.pecify /NOTRANSFER, no copies will be made, and you must keep Gthe volume mounted and the device allocated until the batch processing is complete.2 QUEUEO"SUBMIT/QUEUE:q TYPE[/qualifier[s] filespec[s]f /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy  /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yye# /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yyX /TODAYe /EXCLUDE:filespecB The TYPE command displays the contents of text files on your ter- minal.t< To obtain help on the above qualifiers, type the following: HELP TYPE qualifierY2 DATE TYPE/DATE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]E The /DATE qualifier specifies that you wish the TYPE command to typee& only files created on the given date.2 SINCEp! TYPE/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]fB The /SINCE qualifier specifies that you wish the TYPE command to 4 type only files created on or after the given date.@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 2 THROUGHn# TYPE/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]aD The /THROUGH qualifier specifies that you wish the TYPE command to 5 type only files created on or before the given date.r@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates.2 TODAYg TYPE/TODAY filespec[s]TB The /TODAY qualifier specifies that you wish the TYPE command to  type only files created today. 2 EXCLUDEl" TYPE/EXCLUDE:filespec filespec[s]C The /EXCLUDE qualifer specifies that you wish the TYPE command to D exclude the named file (or files, if named with wildcards) in its  action.ifies that you wish the TYPE command to 5 type only files created on or before the given date.r@ You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates.2 TODAYg TYPE/TODAY filespec[s UNFIX [/qualifier] taskname /REGION /READONLY_SEGMENTD The UNFIX command frees a fixed region from memory. This region mayF be either a task or a common that has been previously fixed using the FIX command.B The /REGION qualifier specifies that it is a common region rather# than a task that is to be unfixed.L The /READONLY_SEGMENT qualifier specifies that it is the read-only segment + of a multiuser task that is to be unfixed." UNLOCK[/qualifier[s]] filespec[s] /DATE:dd-mmm-yy /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy  /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yyE# /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yyE /TODAYO /EXCLUDE:filespecA The UNLOCK command reopens files that have been locked. A locked H file is one that is not closed properly (for example, by a system crashF or an aborted task). Note that locked files may have been corrupted.1 For additional HELP type: HELP UNLOCK qualifier 2 DATE" UNLOCK/DATE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]C The /DATE qualifier specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to A- reopen files created only on the given date.m2 SINCEI# UNLOCK/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]AD The /SINCE qualifier specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to 6 reopen files created only on or after the given date.F You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates, using the following format:6 UNLOCK/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s] 2 THROUGH% UNLOCK/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s][F The /THROUGH qualifier specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to 7 reopen files created only on or before the given date.CF You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates, using the following format:6 UNLOCK/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]2 TODAYt UNLOCK/TODAY filespec[s]GD The /TODAY qualifier specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to ! reopen files created today only.d 2 EXCLUDEs UNLOCK/EXCLUDE:filespecE The /EXCLUDE qualifer reopens all files except the one(s) specified tG in the qualifier. You can name more than one file by using wildcards  in the file specification.cbine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates, using the following format:6 UNLOCK/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]2 TODAYt UNLOCK/TODAY filespec[s]GD The /TODAY qualifier specifies that you wish the UNLOCK command to ! reopen files created today only.d 2 EXCLUDEs UNLOCK/EXCLUDE:filespecE The /EXCLUDE qualifer reopens all files except the one(s)1 HELP&You can get help on a topic by typing: C& HELP topic subtopic subsubtopic... 7,A topic can have one of the following forms: OA 1. An alphanumeric string (e.g. a command name, option, etc.)d+ 2. The match-all or wildcard symbol (*)l Examples: HELP SUBSTITUTE NEXT HELP CHANGE SUBCOMMAND HELP CHI SEIf a topic is abbreviated, HELP displays the text for all topics thatEmatch the abbreviation.B1 KEYPADBEnter the keypad editor through the CHANGE command with the keypadEoption set (see SET KEYPAD command). See HELP CHANGE KEYPAD for more. information.2 VT100eWlqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqk lqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqwqqqqqqqqki]x ^ x DOWN x x x x x x FNDNXT x DEL L x [x x x x x x x  GOLD x HELP x x xamx x x x x LEFT x RIGHT x x x x FIND x UND L xETx UP x v x x x tqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqquXmqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqj x PAGE x SECT x APPEND x DEL W xRDELETE Delete character x x x x xvLINEFEED Delete to beginning of word x COMMANDx FILL x REPLACEx UND W xRBACKSPACE Backup to beginning of line tqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqquZCTRL/A Compute tab level x ADVANCEx BACKUP x CUT x DEL C xRCTRL/D Decrease tab level x x x x xvCTRL/E Increase tab level x BOTTOM x TOP x PASTE x UND C xRCTRL/K Define key tqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqquXCTRL/R Refresh screen x WORD x  EOL x CHAR x xTCTRL/T Adjust tabs x x x x ENTER xmCTRL/U Delete to beginning of line xCHNGCASEx DEL EOLx SPECINSx x RCTRL/W Refresh screen tqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqnqqqqqqqqu xVCTRL/Z Exit to line mode x LINE  x SELECT x xY x x x SUBS x kPress a key for help on that key. x OPEN LINE x RESET x x bTo exit, press the spacebar. mqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqvqqqqqqqqj3 127[DELETE xPDeletes the character preceding the cursor and stores it in the delete characterMbuffer. When the cursor is at the leftmost character position on a line, thexPline terminator to the left is deleted and the text on that line is moved to the$right of the text in the line above.3 300kLINE - (0) .HMoves the cursor forward or backward to the nearest beginning of a line,<depending on the current direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP). q qOPEN LINE - (GOLD 0) [MBreaks the current line into two lines. The break is placed after the cursoriNand leaves the cursor position unchanged. Pressing the OPEN LINE key when the>cursor is at the beginning of a line creates a new blank line.3 301tWORD - (1)HMoves the cursor forward or backward by a word, depending on the current#direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).  kCHNGCASE - (GOLD 1) CChanges the case of a range of characters. Note that, if the selectP?range is active, the case of each letter in the select range isl changed. o3 302TEOL - (2)a rMMoves the cursor forward or backward to the nearest end of line, depending on +current direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).  e eDEL EOL - (GOLD 2) PDeletes all characters to the right of the cursor in the current line, includingMthe character on which the cursor is positioned, up to, but not including the[line terminator.3 303 CHAR - (3) tLMoves the cursor forward or backward one character, depending on the current#direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).m L (SPECINS - (GOLD 3) rKInserts any character from the DEC Multinational Character Set by using its Pdecimal value. Press the GOLD key, enter the code for the character in decimal,=press the GOLD key again, and press SPECINS (special insert).i3 304 ADVANCE - (4)c oPSets the current direction to forward for the CHAR, WORD, LINE, EOL, PAGE, SECT,PSUBS, FIND, and FNDNXT keys. ADVANCE means that movement will be toward the end.of the buffer; that is, to the right and down. L (BOTTOM - (GOLD 4)m r3Positions the cursor at the end of the text buffer.a3 305SBACKUP - (5) PSets the cursor direction to backward for the CHAR, WORD, LINE, EOL, PAGE, SECT,KSUBS, FIND, and FNDNXT keys. BACKUP means that movement will be toward the-5beginning of the buffer; that is, to the left and up.   RTOP - (GOLD 5) C9Positions the cursor at the beginning of the text buffer.n3 306bCUT - (6)f eMMoves the select range to the PASTE buffer. The select range is all the textrObetween the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursor position. IfJno SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the current searchPstring, that string is cut. Each time CUT is used, the previous contents of thePASTE buffer are discarded.f ; aPASTE - (GOLD 6) LInserts the contents of the PASTE buffer directly to the left of the cursor.3 307uPAGE - (7) TPMoves the cursor to the top of a page. A page is defined by a delimiter string,Nwhich can be set by the SET ENTITY command. The default page delimiter is theformfeed character (CTRL/L). n dCOMMAND - (GOLD 7) oKAllows you to enter a line mode command to be executed without exiting from Jkeypad mode. The command is processed when you press the ENTER key on thekeypad.3 308SECT - (8) MMoves the cursor 16 lines (one section) forward or backward, depending on themGcurrent direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP). The cursor is moved to them"beginning of the appropriate line. E NFILL - (GOLD 8)t gPPerforms a word fill on the select range. A word fill reformats a block of textPso that as many full words as possible are placed on each line without exceedingNthe right margin. You can set the right margin with the SET WRAP command. IfOit is not set, the default is the terminal width - 1. For purposes of the FILL 1command, only spaces are used as word delimiters.e3 309sAPPEND - (9) TOMoves the select range to the end of the PASTE buffer. The select range is all Jthe text between the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursorIposition. If no SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the /current search string, that string is appended.  u nREPLACE - (GOLD 9) SODeletes the select range and replaces it with the contents of the PASTE buffer.p3 310 HELP - (PF2) l6Use the HELP key to obtain help on the editing keypad.3 3119FNDNXT - (PF3) rMSearches for the next occurrence of the search string previously entered withnIthe FIND key. The direction of the search is the current one (ADVANCE oroBACKUP). e mFIND - (GOLD PF3)i dNSearches for an occurrence of a string. Press the FIND key and then enter theNstring using the main keyboard. End the string by pressing either the ADVANCEOor BACKUP key to set the direction of the search, or the ENTER key to search innthe current direction.3 312 UP-ARROW P=The ^ (up-arrow) key moves the cursor to the character above.n3 313oDOWN-ARROW ?The v (down-arrow) key moves the cursor to the character below.E3 314ARIGHT-ARROWF AThe --> (right-arrow) key moves the cursor to the next character.s3 315NLEFT-ARROW eEThe <-- (left-arrow) key moves the cursor to the preceding character.e3 316ESELECT - (.) eLMarks one end of a select range. A select range is a block of text on whichPvarious operations (such as CUT, APPEND, or FILL) can be performed. To create a select range: 1F 1. Move the cursor to either the beginning or end of the text you wish to select.1 2. Press the SELECT key.h8 3. Move the cursor to the opposite end of the text. r8You can then perform the desired operation on the range. m sRESET - (GOLD .) cJCancels the effect of the GOLD key if it was pressed by mistake, cancels aIselect range, or cancels any partly entered command string. Also sets the current direction to forward.r3 317 DEL L - (PF4)n ODeletes text from the cursor position to the end of the current line, including Mthe line terminator. If the cursor is positioned at the beginning of a line,oIthe entire line is deleted. The deleted text is saved in the delete lineibuffer.  g UND L - (GOLD PF4) mJInserts the contents of the delete line buffer directly to the left of thecursor.e3 318eDEL W - (-)l nPDeletes text from the cursor to the beginning of the next word, storing the textin the delete word buffer.  tUND W - (GOLD -) tJInserts the contents of the delete word buffer directly to the left of thecursor.o3 319tDEL C - (,)e KDeletes the character on which the cursor is positioned and saves it in theudelete character buffer. ( DUND C - (GOLD ,) tOInserts the contents of the delete character buffer directly to the left of themcursor.(3 320GOLD - (PF1) OLets you use the lower (alternate) function of the editing keys. Press the GOLDf"key, then the key you wish to use. LYou can also use the GOLD key to enter counts. Press GOLD and then the mainKkeyboard numeric keys, followed by the key to which the count should apply.tNThe DELETE key and CTRL/U can be used to edit the number, and thus cannot haveLa count applied to them in this manner. The SPECINS key treats the count as(the code for a character to be inserted. NThe GOLD key is used with main keyboard keys for additional editing functions.PFor help on "GOLD character" (for example, GOLD A), press the character's key onthe main keyboard.3 321t ENTERs@Sends information to EDT for functions such as FIND and COMMAND. t hSUBS - (GOLD ENTER)MDeletes the search string, replaces it with the contents of the PASTE buffer,5and finds the next occurrence of the string. To use:y e 1. Press SELECT.o 2. Type the new text. 3. Press CUT. 4. Press FIND.n+ 5. Enter the text you wish to replace.n GEach time you press SUBS, EDT makes one substitution and finds the next Ioccurrence of the search string. You can use a repeat count for multipleTsubstitutions.3 001FTAB COMPUTE - (CTRL/A) PSets the indentation level count to the value obtained from dividing the currentNcursor column position by the SET TAB number. If the cursor position is not aMmultiple of the SET TAB number, an error results. You must have a SET TAB inreffect to use CTRL/A.e3 004eTAB DECREASE - (CTRL/D)h mKUsed to decrease the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB inoeffect to use CTRL/D.o3 005sTAB INCREASE - (CTRL/E)u iKUsed to increase the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB inveffect to use CTRL/E.b3 008f1BEGINNING OF LINE - (CTRL/H or BACKSPACE)  PMoves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. If the cursor is alreadyKat the beginning of a line, it moves to the beginning of the previous line.e3 009T$TAB INSERT - (CTRL/I or TAB) e$Moves the cursor in one of two ways: uM 1. If the tab size has not been set with SET TAB or if the cursor is notCO at the beginning of the line, a tab character is inserted at the cursorS position.t sL 2. If the tab size has been set with SET TAB or if the cursor is at theH beginning of the line, a number of tab characters and spaces areK inserted to move the cursor to the column position that is equal toi< the SET TAB value times the indentation level count.3 010s:DELETE TO BEGINNING OF WORD - (CTRL/J or LINEFEED) nNUsed to delete all characters from the cursor position to the beginning of theOword containing the cursor. If the cursor is on the first character of a word,tthe previous word is deleted.E3 011rDEFINE KEY - (CTRL/K)  ePUsed to define a new keypad function for an editing key. You are prompted firstMto press the key to be defined, then to enter the definition. You can define Mthe key either in terms of other editing keys or with nokeypad mode commands.OOIf you press an editing key, its definition appears at the bottom of the screenoin the definition line.f3 012o"INSERT FORMFEED - (CTRL/L) r;Inserts a formfeed character () at the cursor position.d3 018EREFRESH - (CTRL/R) RORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersrMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.u(The cursor remains in the same location.3 020iTAB ADJUST - (CTRL/T)  m*Indents the select range. To use the key: t= 1. Create a select range of the text you wish to adjust.eD 2. Enter a level count using the GOLD key. To decrease the tabL indentation level, precede the count with a minus sign. The default level count is 1.d 3. Use the tab adjust key.  LThe effect of CTRL/T is to increase or decrease the indentation level of theOselect range by the number of tabs specified in the level count. You must haveB(a SET TAB value in effect to use CTRL/T.3 021n.DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE - (CTRL/U) aPUsed to delete all characters in the current line to the left of the cursor. IfKthe cursor is on the first character of a line, the entire previous line is deleted.3 023dREFRESH - (CTRL/W) 1ORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersdMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.i(The cursor remains in the same location.3 026 EXIT - (CTRL/Z)R .Shifts EDT to line editing.N3 065 TAB COMPUTE - (GOLD A) eHSets the indentation level count to the value obtained from dividing theMcurrent cursor column position by the SET TAB number. If the cursor positioneOis not a multiple of the SET TAB number, an error results. You must have a SETr"TAB value in effect to use GOLD A.3 068TAB DECREASE - (GOLD D)r oNUsed to decrease the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB valuein effect to use GOLD D.3 069[TAB INCREASE - (GOLD E)g NUsed to increase the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB valuein effect to use GOLD E.3 082tREFRESH - (GOLD R) iORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersTMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.G(The cursor remains in the same location.3 084TAB ADJUST - (GOLD T)a n*Indents the select range. To use the key: = 1. Create a select range of the text you wish to adjust.[D 2. Enter a level count using the GOLD key. To decrease the tabL indentation level, precede the count with a minus sign. The default level count is 1.d 3. Use the tab adjust key.  LThe effect of GOLD T is to increase or decrease the indentation level of theOselect range by the number of tabs specified in the level count. You must haveB(a SET TAB value in effect to use GOLD T.3 085n.DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE - (GOLD U) aPUsed to delete all characters in the current line to the left of the cursor. IfKthe cursor is on the first character of a line, the entire previous line is deleted.3 087dREFRESH - (GOLD W) 1ORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersdMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.i(The cursor remains in the same location.3 090 EXIT - (GOLD Z)L .Shifts EDT to line editing.N3 428 HELP  6Use the HELP key to obtain help on the editing keypad.3 429f DO*Processes the command that was just given. o 3 401h FIND NSearches for an occurrence of a string. Press the FIND key and then enter theNstring using the main keyboard. End the string by pressing either the ADVANCEPor BACKUP key to set the direction of the search, or the DO key to search in thecurrent direction.3 402 INSERT HERE) LLInserts the contents of the PASTE buffer directly to the left of the cursor.3 403bREMOVE iMMoves the select range to the PASTE buffer. The select range is all the textoKbetween the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursor position.sMIf no SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the current searchnLstring, that string is cut. Each time REMOVE is used, the previous contents"of the PASTE buffer are discarded. u n3 404tSELECT ILMarks one end of a select range. A select range is a block of text on whichJvarious operations (such as REMOVE, APPEND, or FILL) can be performed. Tocreate a select range: F 1. Move the cursor to either the beginning or end of the text you wish to select.n 2. Press the SELECT key.a8 3. Move the cursor to the opposite end of the text. h8You can then perform the desired operation on the range. t s3 405ePREVIOUS SCREENe MMoves the cursor 16 lines (one section) backward. The cursor is moved to ther"beginning of the appropriate line. u p3 406sNEXT SCREENE LMoves the cursor 16 lines (one section) forward. The cursor is moved to the"beginning of the appropriate line.  3 424u!BEGINNING OF LINE - (F12)  sPMoves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. If the cursor is alreadyKat the beginning of a line, it moves to the beginning of the previous line.m3 425U+DELETE TO BEGINNING OF WORD - (F13)o sNUsed to delete all characters from the cursor position to the beginning of theOword containing the cursor. If the cursor is on the first character of a word,ithe previous word is deleted.e2 VT52QHJ +--------+--------+--------+--------+)M | | | DEL L | UP | MDELETE Delete character | GOLD | HELP | | |uMLINEFEED Delete to beginning of word | | | UND L |REPLACE |eMBACKSPACE Backup to beginning of line +--------+--------+--------+--------+nM | PAGE | FNDNXT | DEL W | DOWN |oMCTRL/A Compute tab level | | | | |-MCTRL/D Decrease tab level |COMMAND | FIND | UND W | SECT | MCTRL/E Increase tab level +--------+--------+--------+--------+LMCTRL/F Fill text |ADVANCE | BACKUP | DEL C | RIGHT | MCTRL/K Define key | | | | |-MCTRL/R Refresh screen | BOTTOM | TOP | UND C |SPECINS |GMCTRL/T Adjust tabs +--------+--------+--------+--------+ MCTRL/U Delete to beginning of line | WORD | EOL | CUT | LEFT |AMCTRL/W Refresh screen | | | | |-MCTRL/Z Exit to line mode |CHNGCASE|DEL EOL | PASTE | APPEND |NM +--------+--------+--------+--------+ M | LINE | SELECT | ENTER |TM | | | |-M | OPEN LINE | RESET | SUBS |RM*** For help on a key, press the key. +-----------------+--------+--------+ *** To exit, press the spacebar.3 127 DELETE------?Deletes the character preceding the cursor and stores it in the Odelete character buffer. When the cursor is on the leftmost character position Oon a line, the line terminator to the left is deleted and the text on that line 4is moved to the right of the text in the line above.3 300 LINE (0) ----HMoves the cursor forward or backward to the nearest beginning of a line,<depending on the current direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP). - OPEN LINE (GOLD 0)t ---------.IInserts a carriage return/linefeed after the cursor and leaves the cursoroIposition unchanged. Pressing the OPEN LINE key when the cursor is at thet/beginning of the line creates a new blank line.t3 301h WORD (1)e----HMoves the cursor forward or backward by a word, depending on the current#direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).e hCHNGCASE (GOLD 1)--------CChanges the case of a range of characters. Note that, if the selectn?range is active, the case of each letter in the select range is- changed. 3 302aEOL (2)---eMMoves the cursor forward or backward to the nearest end of line, depending onP/the current direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP).  t lDEL EOL (GOLD 2)l-------tPDeletes all characters to the right of the cursor in the current line, includingMthe character on which the cursor is positioned, up to, but not including the)line terminator.3 303aCUT (3)---fLMoves the select range to the PASTE buffer. The select range is all the textObetween the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursor position. IffJno SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the current searchPstring, that string is cut. Each time CUT is used, the previous contents of thePASTE buffer are discarded.f e rPASTE (GOLD 3)t-----iLInserts the contents of the PASTE buffer directly to the left of the cursor.3 304h ADVANCE (4)------- PSets the current direction to forward for the CHAR, WORD, LINE, EOL, PAGE, SECT,PSUBS, FIND, and FNDNXT keys. ADVANCE means that movement will be toward the end.of the buffer; that is, to the right and down. u rBOTTOM (GOLD 4)------3Positions the cursor at the end of the text buffer.T3 305d BACKUP (5)s------PSets the cursor direction to backward for the CHAR, WORD, LINE, EOL, PAGE, SECT,KSUBS, FIND, and FNDNXT keys. BACKUP means that movement will be toward the5beginning of the buffer; that is, to the left and up.o r o TOP (GOLD 5)D---E9Positions the cursor at the beginning of the text buffer.e3 306t DEL C (6)-----oKDeletes the character on which the cursor is positioned and saves it in the delete character buffer. h uUND C (GOLD 6)f-----xOInserts the contents of the delete character buffer directly to the left of theocursor.R3 307 PAGE (7)P----PMoves the cursor to the top of a page. A page is defined by a delimiter string,Nwhich can be set by the SET ENTITY command. The default page delimiter is theformfeed character (CTRL/L). h eCOMMAND (GOLD 7) -------KAllows you to enter a line mode command to be executed without exiting fromtJkeypad mode. The command is processed when you press the ENTER key on thekeypad.x n3 308h FNDNXT (8) ------MSearches for the next occurrence of the search string previously entered withIthe FIND key. The direction of the search is the current one (ADVANCE ortBACKUP). h FIND (GOLD 8)----NSearches for an occurrence of a string. Press the FIND key and then enter theNstring using the main keyboard. End the string by pressing either the ADVANCEOor BACKUP key to set the direction of the search, or the ENTER key to search in the current direction.3 309 DEL W (9)-----hPDeletes text from the cursor to the beginning of the next word, storing the textin the delete word buffer. k UND W (GOLD 9) -----rJInserts the contents of the delete word buffer directly to the left of thecursor.f3 310c HELP (RED) ----6Use the HELP key to obtain help on the editing keypad.3 311 DEL L (GRAY)t-----nODeletes text from the cursor position to the end of the current line, includinghMthe line terminator. If the cursor is positioned at the beginning of a line,-Ithe entire line is deleted. The deleted text is saved in the delete linenbuffer.t n eUND L (GOLD GRAY)----- JInserts the contents of the delete line buffer directly to the left of thecursor.o3 312fUP (UP-ARROW)--=The ^ (up-arrow) key moves the cursor to the character above.t e iREPLACE (GOLD UP-ARROW)-------ODeletes the select range and replaces it with the contents of the PASTE buffer.l3 313DOWN (DOWN-ARROW)----?The v (down-arrow) key moves the cursor to the character below.l  dSECT (GOLD DOWN-ARROW) ----MMoves the cursor 16 lines (one section) forward or backward, depending on thehGcurrent direction (see ADVANCE and BACKUP). The cursor is moved to theo"beginning of the appropriate line.3 314oRIGHT (RIGHT-ARROW)-----eAThe --> (right-arrow) key moves the cursor to the next character.e  SPECINS (GOLD RIGHT-ARROW)w-------oKInserts any character from the DEC Multinational Character Set by using itsrPdecimal value. Press the GOLD key, enter the code for the character in decimal,=press the GOLD key again, and press SPECINS (special insert).c3 315dLEFT (LEFT-ARROW)----EThe <-- (left-arrow) key moves the cursor to the preceding character.n  tAPPEND (GOLD LEFT-ARROW)o------OMoves the select range to the end of the PASTE buffer. The select range is allaJthe text between the selected position (see SELECT) and the current cursorIposition. If no SELECT has been made and the cursor is positioned on the /current search string, that string is appended.t3 316e SELECT (.) ------LMarks one end of a select range. A select range is a block of text on whichPvarious operations (such as CUT, APPEND, or FILL) can be performed. To create a select range:L EN 1. Move the cursor to either the beginning or end of the text you wish to select.l 2. Press the SELECT key.e8 3. Move the cursor to the opposite end of the text. 8You can then perform the desired operation on the range.  rRESET (GOLD .),-----tJCancels the effect of the GOLD key if it was pressed by mistake, cancels aJselect range, or cancels any partly entered command string. Also sets thecurrent direction to forward.e3 320m GOLD (BLUE)----OLets you use the lower (alternate) function of the editing keys. Press the GOLDe"key, then the key you wish to use. .LYou can also use the GOLD key to enter counts. Press GOLD and then the mainKkeyboard numeric keys, followed by the key to which the count should apply.ENThe DELETE key and CTRL/U can be used to edit the number, and thus cannot haveLa count applied to them in this manner. The SPECINS key treats the count as(the code for a character to be inserted. dNThe GOLD key is used with main keyboard keys for additional editing functions.PFor help on "GOLD character" (for example, GOLD A), press the character's key onthe main keyboard.3 321tENTERt-----s@Sends information to EDT for functions such as FIND and COMMAND. tSUBS (GOLD ENTER)----MDeletes the search string, replaces it with the contents of the PASTE buffer,o5and finds the next occurrence of the string. To use:E S 1. Press SELECT.s 2. Type the new text. 3. Press CUT. 4. Press FIND.w+ 5. Enter the text you wish to replace.  cGEach time you press SUBS, EDT makes one substitution and finds the nextrIoccurrence of the search string. You can use a repeat count for multipleosubstitutions.3 001sTAB COMPUTE (CTRL/A). -----------GPSets the indentation level count to the value obtained from dividing the currentNcursor column position by the SET TAB number. If the cursor position is not aMmultiple of the SET TAB number, an error results. You must have a SET TAB inseffect to use CTRL/A. 3 004tTAB DECREASE (CTRL/D) ------------KUsed to decrease the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB in effect to use CTRL/D. 3 005 TAB INCREASE (CTRL/E) ------------KUsed to increase the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB inveffect to use CTRL/E.b3 006fFILL (CTRL/F)----PPerforms a word fill on the select range. A word fill reformats a block of textPso that as many full words as possible are placed on each line without exceedingNthe right margin. You can set the right margin with the SET WRAP command. IfOit is not set, the default is the terminal width - 1. For purposes of the FILL 1command, only spaces are used as word delimiters.-3 008d(BEGINNING OF LINE (CTRL/H or BACKSPACE)-----------------SPMoves the cursor to the beginning of the current line. If the cursor is alreadyKat the beginning of a line, it moves to the beginning of the previous line.m3 009lTAB INSERT (CTRL/I or TAB) ----------$Moves the cursor in one of two ways: uP 1. If the tab size has not been set with SET TAB or if the cursor is not atL the beginning of the line, a tab character is inserted at the cursor position.eL 2. If the tab size has been set with SET TAB or if the cursor is at theH beginning of the line, a number of tab characters and spaces areO inserted to move the cursor to the column position that is equal to the 8 SET TAB value times the indentation level count.3 010h1DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE (CTRL/J or LINEFEED)b---------------------------ENUsed to delete all characters from the cursor position to the beginning of theNword containing the cursor. If the cursor is on the first character of a wordthe previous word is deleted. 3 011iDEFINE KEY (CTRL/K)n ----------PUsed to define a new keypad function for an editing key. You are prompted firstMto press the key to be defined, then to enter the definition. You can define Mthe key either in terms of other editing keys or with nokeypad mode commands.EOIf you press an editing key, its definition appears at the bottom of the screen in the definition line. 3 012INSERT FORMFEED (CTRL/L)----------------;Inserts a formfeed character () at the cursor position.d3 0181REFRESH (CTRL/R)--------ORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the characterstMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.n(The cursor remains in the same location.3 020gTAB ADJUST (CTRL/T) ----------*Indents the select range. To use the key: o= 1. Create a select range of the text you wish to adjust. D 2. Enter a level count using the GOLD key. To decrease the tabL indentation level, precede the count with a minus sign. The default level count is 1.n 3. Use the tab adjust key.n nLThe effect of CTRL/T is to increase or decrease the indentation level of theOselect range by the number of tabs indicated by the level count. You must haveD(a SET TAB value in effect to use CTRL/T.3 021n%DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE (CTRL/U)e---------------------------oPUsed to delete all characters in the current line to the left of the cursor. IfKthe cursor is on the first character of a line, the entire previous line isddeleted.3 023eREFRESH (CTRL/W)------- ORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the characterseMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages. (The cursor remains in the same location.3 026 EXIT (CTRL/Z)----Shifts EDT to line editing.  T3 065TAB COMPUTE (GOLD A)- ----------- HSets the indentation level count to the value obtained from dividing theMcurrent cursor column position by the SET TAB number. If the cursor positioneOis not a multiple of the SET TAB number, an error results. You must have a SETs"TAB value in effect to use GOLD A.3 068eTAB DECREASE (GOLD D) ------------NUsed to decrease the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB valuein effect to use GOLD D.3 069-TAB INCREASE (GOLD E) ------------NUsed to increase the indentation level counter. You must have a SET TAB valuein effect to use GOLD E.3 070tFILL (GOLD F)----PPerforms a word fill on the select range. A word fill reformats a block of textPso that as many full words as possible are placed on each line without exceedingNthe right margin. The right margin can be set by the SET WRAP command. If itLis not set, the default is the terminal width - 1. For purposes of the FILL1command, only spaces are used as word delimiters.-3 082dREFRESH (GOLD R)-------lORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the charactersIMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages.r(The cursor remains in the same location.3 084aTAB ADJUST (GOLD T) ----------GAdjusts the tab level of the select range. The key is used as follows:  = 1. Create a select range of the text you wish to adjust.iD 2. Enter a level count using the GOLD key. To decrease the tabL indentation level, precede the count with a minus sign. The default level count is 1.  3. Use the tab adjust key.n eLThe effect of GOLD T is to increase or decrease the indentation level of theOselect range by the number of tabs indicated by the level count. You must haved(a SET TAB value in effect to use GOLD T.3 085 %DELETE TO BEGINNING OF LINE (GOLD U)e---------------------------oPUsed to delete all characters in the current line to the left of the cursor. IfKthe cursor is on the first character of a line, the entire previous line isddeleted.3 087eREFRESH (GOLD W)------- ORefreshes the screen display. The screen becomes blank and then the characterseMin the buffer reappear, minus extraneous characters, such as system messages. (The cursor remains in the same location.3 090 EXIT (GOLD Z)----Shifts EDT to line editing.  O1 CHANGEGThe CHANGE command puts EDT in change mode. Use change mode to edit atl/the character level rather than the line level.  t-Format: CHANGE [range] [;nokeypad command(s)]u iFThe optional range specifies the cursor position when you enter change7mode. If you omit range, the current position is used.a rGThere are three submodes of change mode. Which submode you use dependseHon the type of terminal you are using and whether or not you wish to useFthe auxiliary (numeric) keypad for editing commands. These modes are:  1. Hardcopy modee 2. Keypad modea 3. Nokeypad mode  hDIf the CHANGE command contains a semicolon (;) it may be followed byFnokeypad commands. If the last nokeypad command is EX, EDT returns toBline mode for the next command line. This is the only form of theCCHANGE command that may be used in a startup command file or macro. 2 ENTITIESBEntities are used in nokeypad mode commands to specify the text onBwhich a command will operate. Each entity represents a portion ofEtext, which may be anything from a single character to an entire textpFbuffer. Most entities can be preceded by a count, which indicates theGnumber of entities to be affected. The entities are: character, word, e4line, sentence, page, paragraph, select, and string. 2 HARDCOPY6On a hardcopy terminal, change mode operates this way: m@When you enter change mode, EDT displays the current line on theFterminal. The cursor position is marked by bracketing the character on>which the cursor is positioned. EDT will then prompt with the characters:r e C* iFIn response, you type a series of nokeypad mode commands terminated byDpressing return. EDT will execute the commands and type the currentline.r2 KEYPADFYou enter the keypad mode of change mode when your terminal is a VT52,FVT100- or VT200-series, and the keypad option is set. (This option isFset by default for these terminals.) In this mode the terminal screenAis used to view the text buffer. Characters typed using the mainiBkeyboard are inserted into the buffer at the cursor position. YouFenter editing commands by using keys on the auxiliary keypad, function,keys, or control keys on the main keyboard.  FFor more help on keypad mode, type CHANGE to enter that mode. Use the keypad HELP facility as follows: ,@ 1. If your terminal is a VT100- or VT200-series, press the  keypad key marked PF2.= 2. If your terminal is a VT52, press the red keypad key. I 3. If your terminal has function keys, press the function key markedn HELP.t 2 NOKEYPADFYou enter the nokeypad mode of change mode if your terminal is a VT52,EVT100- or VT200-series, and the SET NOKEYPAD command has been used tooDturn off the keypad option. The screen is used as a window into theBtext buffer. You type nokeypad mode commands at the keyboard; theyEecho on the bottom line of the screen. EDT executes the commands and :updates the text on the screen whenever you press return. 2 SUBCOMMANDSm@When EDT is in change mode and SET NOKEYPAD is in effect or yourCterminal is set to HARDCOPY, EDT accepts a distinct set of commandstCcalled the nokeypad mode commands. You may concatenate a string ofa6these commands with or without spaces separating them. eCNokeypad commands take one of the following forms, depending on theoparticular command:d h 1. commando 2. [+|-][count]command = 3. [+|-][count][command][+|-][count][+|-]entity[=buffer]e @Whenever a sign can appear in more than one place, the last sign#specified determines the direction.e1 CLEAR 4The CLEAR (abbreviated CL) command deletes a buffer. Format: CLEAR buffer cHThe buffer no longer appears on the list printed by SHOW BUFFER. If theIbuffer was a macro, it is no longer a macro. If the buffer contained anyoGtext, that text is deleted. If that buffer was the current buffer, the.Jcurrent buffer becomes MAIN. There are two exceptions to these rules: theLbuffers PASTE and MAIN. The CLEAR command does not delete these buffers butNjust deletes their text. Note that the argument is a buffer name, not a rangeIspecification: CLEAR PASTE is valid, while CLEAR =PASTE and CLEAR BUFFERrPASTE are not.1 COPYBThe COPY (abbreviated CO) command copies text from one location toEanother within a buffer or between buffers. When text is copied, thehsource text remains intact.f ;Format: COPY [range-1] TO [range-2] [/QUERY] [/DUPLICATE:n]t hHThe lines specified by range-1 are copied above the first line specifiedHby range-2. Either range defaults to the current line. Either range mayinclude a buffer specification.c oAIf the destination is not the current buffer, put the name of theTFreceiving buffer immediately after TO (=buffer). Give the full name of=the buffer. To copy text from an external file, see INCLUDE.e 2 /DUPLICATEFormat: /DUPLICATE:n aCWhen you use the /DUPLICATE (abbreviated /DUP) qualifier, the linesI,specified by range-1 are duplicated n times.2 /QUERYFormat: /QUERY eHWhen you use the /QUERY (abbreviated /Q) qualifier, EDT prompts you with5a question mark (?) to verify each line to be copied.e sResponses are:  Y Yes, copy this lineo! N No, do not copy this lineyA Q Quit, do not copy any of the remaining lines in the rangex+ A All, copy all the rest of the linesP1 DEFINEDThe DEFINE command (abbreviated DEF) defines either editing keys for$keypad mode or macros for line mode.2 KEYaBThe DEFINE KEY (abbreviated DEF K) command creates definitions forCediting keys for use in keypad mode. You can redefine keypad keys,nCcontrol key sequences and GOLD control key sequences. You can also3define function keys, for terminals that have them.  s'Format: DEFINE KEY key-name AS 'string't3 VT529 +-------+-------+-------+-------+ 9This diagram shows | | | | |d9the numbers of the | 20 | 10 | 11 | 12 |i9keypad keys on VT52 | | | | |d9terminals for use in +-------+-------+-------+-------+d9the DEFINE KEY | | | | |n9command. | 7 | 8 | 9 | 13 |o9 | | | | |K9 +-------+-------+-------+-------+-9 | | | | | 9 | 4 | 5 | 6 | 14 | 9 | | | | | 9 +-------+-------+-------+-------+-9 | | | | | 9 | 1 | 2 | 3 | 15 | 9 | | | | | 9 +-------+-------+-------+-------+-9 | | | | 9 | 0 | 16 | 21 | 9 | | | | 9 +---------------+-------+-------+-3 VT100-I+-------+-------+-------+-------+ +-------+-------+-------+-------+ I| | | | | | | | | | I| 12 | 13 | 15 | 14 | | 20 | 10 | 11 | 17 | I| | | | | | | | | | I+-------+-------+-------+-------+ +-------+-------+-------+-------+ I | | | | | IThe diagram to the right shows the | 7 | 8 | 9 | 18 |-Inumbers of the keypad keys on VT100 | | | | | Iterminals for use in the DEFINE KEY +-------+-------+-------+-------+ Icommand. Above are the numbers for | | | | | Ithe arrow keys, for terminals that | 4 | 5 | 6 | 19 |-Ido not have function keys. | | | | | I +-------+-------+-------+-------+eI | | | | |yI | 1 | 2 | 3 | | I | | | | |rI +-------+-------+-------+ 21 |oI | | | |iI | 0 | 16 | | I | | | | I +---------------+-------+-------+ 2 MACRO FThe DEFINE MACRO (abbreviated DEF M) command defines a line mode macrocommand. Format: DEFINE MACRO name  EThe name is the name of the text buffer in which the macro is stored. GThe macro itself is a series of EDT line mode commands. You invoke the =macro by giving its name in response to the line mode prompt. 1 DELETELThe DELETE (abbreviated D) command deletes the lines specified by the range. Format: DELETE [range] [/QUERY]  AIf you do not specify the range, the default is the current line.M2 /QUERYFormat: /QUERY aIWhen you use the QUERY (abbreviated /Q) qualifier, EDT prompts you with a4question mark (?) to verify each line to be deleted. oResponses are: a Y Yes, delete this linei# N No, do not delete this lineaC Q Quit, do not delete any of the remaining lines in the rangeE- A All, delete all the rest of the linese1 EXITEThe EXIT (abbreviated EX) command terminates all action in the editoru<and saves a copy of the MAIN text buffer in the output file. Q8Format: EXIT [file-spec] [/SEQUENCE:[init:incr]] [/SAVE] AIf you omit the file specification, the output file name from the Gcommand line that invoked EDT is used. If no output file name has beensHspecified, and if /READ_ONLY and /NOOUTPUT have not been specified, thenthe input file name is used.2 /SAVEEAWhen you use the /SAVE qualifier, the journal file is saved. The(Ejournal file is called 'name.JOU', where name is the output file name Ffrom the command line. For information about the journal facility, see HELP JOURNAL.E 2 /SEQUENCErFormat: /SEQUENCE[:init:incr]  eFWhen you use the /SEQUENCE option, the output file is in VFC (variableGwith fixed control) format, and line numbers are written in the control_Dfield. The values of both 'init' and 'incr' must be less than 65536. uIIf you set init and incr, the file is renumbered starting with the number.Dyou choose for init, and the lines are incremented by the number youJchoose for incr. Otherwise, the line numbers assigned by EDT are written.EThese line numbers are truncated to integers and taken modulo 100000,with a maximum value of 65535.1 FILLDThe FILL (abbreviated FIL) command reformats a block of text so thatHthere are as many full words on a line as possible without exceeding the right margin.e tFormat: FILL [range] tFThe lines in the range must be contiguous. If you omit the range, theselect range is assumed. aGThe right margin can be set by the SET WRAP command. If the margin hasu8not been set, the default is the terminal width minus 1.1 FINDDThe FIND (abbreviated F) command places the cursor at the first linespecified by range.( rFormat: FIND [range] rGThe located line is not displayed. To find and display a line, use theo TYPE command.e eHEx: F=X. Returns EDT to buffer X, to the line EDT was on when you lastH left buffer X. Note the dot (.) after the buffer name. ThisG specifies the line that EDT was on when you last left bufferr X.e 1 INCLUDE EThe INCLUDE (abbreviated INC) command copies external files into text)buffers. e!Format: INCLUDE file-spec [range]c eEThe specified file is copied to the location before the first line ofpHthe range. Note that range specifies the position to which the file willEbe copied; it does not restrict the portion of the file which will be Cincluded. To include part of a file, first INCLUDE the file into a Cbuffer; then COPY the desired portion of the included text into therappropriate buffer.N1 INSERT?The INSERT (abbreviated I) command inserts new text into a textxbuffer.r +Format: INSERT [range] ;line to be insertedh Or: INSERT [range] text to be inserted ^Z EThe new text is inserted above the first line specified by range. Ifl<you omit range, new text is inserted above the current line. iHIf you choose the first form of the INSERT command, the text on the lineHfollowing the semicolon is inserted and the editor does not enter insertFmode. This is the only form of the INSERT command that should be used#in a startup command file or macro. oGIf you choose the second form, EDT enters insert mode. In insert mode, Fyou can enter as many lines of text as you wish, terminating each line>by pressing return. Terminate insert mode by pressing CTRL/Z. CThe line following the last line inserted becomes the current line. 1 JOURNALcDEDT saves all input from the terminal during an editing session in aDfile called the journal file. The journal file is deleted when youHexit the editor with an EXIT or QUIT command (without the /SAVE option).?If the editor is left involuntarily, the journal file is saved.s EThe journal file can be used to redo all the operations of an editingcEsession. The edited file is thereby recreated. Type the same commandFline used previously with the addition of the /RECOVER qualifier. AllDinput files used in the original session must be available under the(same names as when they were first read. EUnless explicitly overridden by the /JOURNAL qualifier on the commandUBline, the journal file will have the same name as the output file,Eexcept that the file type will be JOU and the file will be written intthe current default directory.1 MOVE@The MOVE (abbreviated M) command moves text from one location to0another, deleting it from the original location. ,Format: MOVE [range-1] TO [range-2] [/QUERY] BThe lines specified by range-1 are moved to a location immediatelyFabove the first line specified by range-2. The lines are deleted fromGthe original location. If you omit either of the range specifications, Dthe current line is used. The first line of range-2 becomes the newDcurrent line. To move lines of text without deleting them from the(original location, see the COPY command.2 /QUERYFormat: /QUERY nGWhen you use the QUERY (abbreviated /Q) qualifier, EDT prompts you with 4a question mark (?) to verify each line to be moved. Responses are: e Y Yes, move this line." N No, do not move this line.A Q Quit, do not move any of the remaining lines in the rangep, A All, move all the rest of the lines.1 PRINTnAThe PRINT (abbreviated P) command creates a listing file with thewspecified file name. Format: PRINT file-spec [range]C EThe lines selected by range are written to a listing format file withaFpage headers. If the NUMBERS option is set (see SET NUMBERS), the EDTGline numbers will appear on the listing. If you omit range, the entirenGcurrent buffer is printed. Print does not alter the current line. UsetFPRINT only to create a listing. If you wish to create a file, use theWRITE command.1 QUITDThe QUIT command exits the editor without saving the contents of the MAIN buffer. Format: QUIT [/SAVE] rGUse the QUIT command only if you have made no changes to the buffer youiFare editing or if you have decided you do not wish to save the changesByou have made. All edits will be discarded when you QUIT from theeditor.t2 /SAVErCThe SAVE qualifier specifies that the journal file should be saved.4Normally, the journal file is deleted when you QUIT.1 RANGEuERange specifications select the exact lines of text on which the lineuediting command will operate.A b:There are several general classes of range specifications: 9 1. Single line ranges specify a single line of text. M 2. Multiple line ranges specify blocks of text, such as an entire buffer D or all lines from the current line to the end of the buffer.L 3. Compound ranges combine single line ranges with operators to specify multiple lines of text.yL 4. Noncontiguous ranges specify multiple lines that are not necessarily adjacent to one another.2 ALLe<The ALL range further refines a general range specification. :Format: [range] ALL 'string' sEWhile range can be a single, multiple, or compound range, the commandoEbeing performed will only apply to those lines of text containing theuGgiven string. This string can be enclosed in single or double quotationgmarks. gFEx: TYPE ALL 'EDT' When ALL is used, the default for range isH WHOLE. This command will type all the linesG in the current buffer containing the stringe" 'EDT'. rF SUBS/A/B/50:100 ALL '1' Substitute B for A in all lines from 50 to; 100 which include the string 1.o2 ANDs.The AND range selects a group of single lines. *Format: range-1 AND range-2 AND range3 ...& Or: range-1 , range-2 , range3 ... CEach of the ranges must be a single line range. Each of the single lines is operated on.w @Ex: TYPE 4 AND 7 Lines 4 and 7 are displayed on the terminal B TYPE BEGIN,END-1 The first and last lines are displayed on the terminalu2 BEGINAEThe BEGIN range (abbreviated B) is a single line range that specifies the first line in the buffer. 2 BEFORE@The BEFORE range (abbreviated BEF) is a multiple line range thatAspecifies all the lines in the buffer preceding the current line. 2 BUFFEREThe BUFFER (abbreviated BU) specification may precede any other rangeFspecification and indicates that the range is to be applied to a namedbuffer.E GFormat: BUFFER name [range]i Or: =name [range]e FThe two forms are equivalent. Name is the name of the buffer in whichCthe text resides. If you leave out the range, the entire buffer is selected.2 DOTOEThe dot (.) is a single line range that refers to the current line of Etext. For many commands, dot is the default range. See the help textF/for a command if you are unsure of the default.  e'Ex: TYPE . Display the current line.t2 ENDnGThe END (abbreviated E) range specifies an imaginary line following theiClast line in the buffer. END does not specify the last line in thetCbuffer. The last line can be referred to by E-1 (that is, the lineh;preceding END). When the END line is typed, it looks like:. s[EOB]l2 FORrFThe FOR range is a multiple line range that selects a specified number*of lines starting at a specified location. Format: [range] FOR nr Or: [range] # ne x@The two forms are equivalent. Range is a single line range thatFspecifies the starting position, and n is an integer number. If range6is omitted, the current line is the starting position. rEEx: TYPE . FOR 5 Display 5 lines, starting with the current linen N8 TYPE #5 Equivalent to the previous example > TYPE BEGIN FOR 10 Display the first 10 lines in the buffer2 LASTHThe LAST (abbreviated L) range is a single line range that refers to theHline in the previous buffer which was the current line when you switchedto the current buffer.2 MINUS FThe minus sign (-) in ranges selects a single line that is a specified(number of lines before a specified line. Format: [range] - [n]  iHRange is a single line range, and n is an integer. The line selected isDthe line that is n lines before the line specified by range. If you?omit range, the current line is used; if you omit n, 1 is used.) nGEx: TYPE 15 - 3 Display the third line before the line numbered 15.  c8 TYPE END -1 Display the last line in the buffer. e. TYPE - Display the previous line.2 NUMBERGA line number is a single line range that refers to the line having the?specified number. The line number may contain a decimal point.s 'Ex: TYPE 10 Display line number 10.t ' INSERT 65.3 Insert above line 65.3.a .HThe maximum allowable line number is 2814749767. A line number may have4up to five digits to the right of the decimal point. h?You can change the line number with the RESEQUENCE command. InnGaddition, the INSERT and INCLUDE commands will automatically change theUGnumbers of existing lines if necessary to make each line in a buffer to 1have a line number larger than the previous line.n dAWhen lines are read from the primary input file and that file has Fsequence numbers, the line number assigned is the sequence number fromDthe file, plus N*100000, where N is large enough to ensure that eachCline in the buffer has a line number larger than the previous line. 5File sequence numbers range in value from 0 to 65535.I 2 ORIGINALFormat: ORIGINAL n cFThe ORIGINAL (abbreviated O) range is no longer a feature of EDT. TheHkeyword ORIGINAL is ignored; the number specified is taken as an editing9line number. See HELP RANGE NUMBER for more information.a2 PLUSCThe plus sign selects, in ranges, a single line that is a specifiedh'number of lines after a specified line.n hFormat: [range] + [n]i iHRange is a single line range, and n is an integer. The line selected isHthe line that is n lines after the line specified by range. If you omit;range, the current line is used. If you omit n, 1 is used.t FEx: TYPE 15 + 3 Display the third line after the line numbered 15. : TYPE BEGIN +1 Display the second line in the buffer. a@ TYPE + Display the line following the current line. iC TYPE 'string'+2 Display the second line following the next line ( continaing 'string'.2 RESTFThe REST (abbreviated R) range is a multiple line range that refers to7the current line and all lines following in the buffer.c2 SELECTAThe SELECT range is a multiple line range that contains all linespHbetween the current line and the SELECT mark. The SELECT mark is set byCthe change mode SEL nokeypad command or the keypad SELECT function. 2 STRINGDA quoted string specifies a single line that contains the specifiedGstring. You can enclose the string in either single or double quotationBmarks (' or "). When you use a string as a range, EDT will searchEforward, starting with the current line, until it locates a line with Cthe specified string. If a minus sign (-) precedes the string, theisearch will be backward. eGEx: TYPE 'abc' Locate and display the first line forward that containse! the string 'abc'.u i9 TYPE -"abc" Same, except the search will be backward.t2 THRUGThe THRU range is a compound range that specifies all lines between twodsingle line ranges.k 'Format: range-1 THRU range-2 Or: range-1 : range-2h oFBoth forms are equivalent. Starting with range-1, EDT selects all the8lines up to and including the line specified by range-2. FEx: TYPE 15:30 Display all lines with numbers between 15 and 30. fB TYPE 'glorp':END Display all lines from the first line forward3 containing 'glorp' to the end. 2 WHOLEtAThe WHOLE (abbreviated W) range refers to the entire text buffer.e 1 REPLACEwHThe REPLACE (abbreviated R) command deletes the specified range of lines#and then places EDT in INSERT mode.v n'Format: REPLACE [range] ;text to insertl Or: REPLACE [range]l text to insert ^Z EWhen you do not specify a range, replace deletes the current line and.&inserts the new text at that location. sFIf you use the first form of the REPLACE command, EDT inserts the textCin the command line following the semicolon and the editor does notnEenter insert mode. This is the only form of the REPLACE command thate3should be used in startup command files and macros.  IGIf you use the second form, EDT enters insert mode. In insert mode youCGcan enter as many lines of text as you wish, terminating each line withfAa carriage return. You terminate insert mode by pressing CTRL/Z.e aCThe line following the last line inserted becomes the current line.d 1 RESEQUENCEFThe RESEQUENCE (abbreviated RES) command assigns new line numbers to arange of lines.e m0Format: RESEQUENCE [range] [/SEQUENCE:init:incr] aHThe specified range of lines must be contiguous. When you do not specifyFa range, all lines in the current buffer are resequenced. If the newEnumbers assigned would cause duplicate or nonsequential line numbers,aAEDT will either disallow the command or renumber lines beyond the specified range. sGNote that the total count of lines resequenced (which is displayed upon(?completion of the command), may differ from the number of lineslBoriginally specified in the range, due to the possibility of extra renumbering. 2 /SEQUENCEmCThe SEQUENCE (abbreviated /SEQ) qualifier specifies the sequence of Anumbers to be assigned. The init parameter specifies the initiald<number, and incr specifies the number by which the lines areEincremented. If you do not use the SEQUENCE qualifier, init and incr.both default to 1. a<The maximum allowable line number is 2814749767. If, duringEresequencing, a line number plus 'incr' would exceed this value, thatsEline and all remaining lines will be numbered 2814749767. You should Gcorrect this immediately by resequencing with a different 'init' and/ornsmaller 'incr'.o1 SETiGThe SET (abbreviated SE) command sets options that control other editoriHoperations. Once set, these options are in effect throughout the rest of5the edit session or until changed by the SET command. 2 AUTOREPEATHThe SET AUTOREPEAT (abbreviated SE AUTOREPEAT) command enables EDT's useDof the DECARM VT100 control sequence to prevent keypad, function andHarrow keys from repeating faster than EDT can update the screen. If youEdo not want EDT to manipulate the VT100's autorepeat feature, use SET @NOAUTOREPEAT (abbreviated SE NOAUTOREPEAT). On some VT100-classHterminals, SET AUTOREPEAT can cause the arrow keys to repeat at the rate>of 2 per second rather than the usual 30 per second. With SETHNOAUTOREPEAT the arrow keys repeat faster, but the screen is not updatedFfor each repeat of the arrow key, since EDT skips intermediate updatesif it gets behind. Format: SET [NO]AUTOREPEAT2 CASE)Format: SET CASE { UPPER | LOWER | NONE }  CUse the SET CASE (abbreviated SE CA) command on terminals which are(Hcapable of displaying uppercase characters only. SET CASE instructs EDTHto flag with a preceding apostrophe either the uppercase characters, theDlowercase characters, or neither. The default for SET CASE is NONE,&which means no characters are flagged. d+You can abbreviate the keywords as follows:  p CASE CA UPPER Ue LOWER L NONE N] 2 COMMAND&Format: SET COMMAND file-specification NEThe SET COMMAND (abbreviated SE COMMAND) command is used in a startuphDcommand file to specify the name of the next startup command file toFread. EDT provides a default file type of ".EDT". If the file is notBpresent this command does nothing; otherwise it causes the currentEcommand file to be abandoned and the new one to be read in its place.b 3 STARTUPeEWhen EDT starts up, it reads the installation default startup command Ffile. The name of the file is always EDTSYS. The default name varies$depending on the system, as follows: N Default Name$ -----------------#VAX/VMS SYS$LIBRARY:.EDT RSX-11M & M-PLUS LB:[1,2].EDT RSTS/E LB:.EDT AWhen opening the file, EDT combines the name and the default nameGtogether into a complete file specification. On VAX/VMS, therefore, if Ethe logical name EDTSYS is defined, EDT will read from it rather than from SYS$LIBRARY:EDTSYS.EDT. fEThe installation default startup command file should have SET COMMAND,FEDTINI at its end, so that the user's initialization file will be readFafter the installation default initialization file. If EDTSYS is notHfound, EDT will try again using the name EDTINI, so there is no need forBan installation-default initialization file that just contains SETCOMMAND EDTINI.o2 CURSORFormat: SET CURSOR top:bottoma aEThe SET CURSOR (abbreviated SE CU) command, used with screen editing,ABsets the limits within which the cursor is allowed to move withoutscrolling the screen. IDTop and bottom are the line numbers at the top of the screen and theHbottom of the screen. The line numbers must be in the range of 0 to 21,Gwith 0 specifying the top of the screen and 21 the bottom. The defaultiGsetting is 7:14, allowing the cursor to move within the middle third ofDGthe screen. If SET LINES is used to decrease the number of lines shownrEon the screen, the top and bottom of the cursor limits must be withinh"the number of lines on the screen.2 ENTITY1Format: SET ENTITY entity-type 'delimiter string'e n*Where entity-type is one of the following: t WORD (abbreviated W)r SENTENCE (abbreviated S),! PAGE (abbreviated PAG)s! PARAGRAPH (abbreviated PAR)l FThe SET ENTITY (abbreviated SE EN) command sets the delimiters for theGuser-defined change mode entities. For the WORD and SENTENCE entities,rGthe delimiter string is a set of single character delimiters. For PAGEDand PARAGRAPH, the delimiter is a character string that delimits theCentity. See HELP CHANGE ENTITIES for explanations of the entities.w2 FNFtFormat: SET [NO]FNFb iDThe SET FNF option controls whether or not an informative message isFdisplayed when you attempt to edit a non-existing file. NOFNF opens anew file but gives no message.2 HELP%Format: SET HELP [file-specification]t .FThe SET HELP (abbreviated SE H) option lets you define which help fileHwill be accessed when you either give the HELP command or press the HELPCkey in keypad mode. The default device and directory are always asEGlisted below unless overriden by an explicit device and directory. SEThEHELP without a file specification returns you to the original defaultp help file. aAThe following are default specifications for the various systems:v n5 File specification Name Typen5 ------------------ ---- ---- 5VAX/VMS SYS$HELP: .HLB EDTHELP .HLBr5RSX-11M & M-PLUS LB:[1,2] .HLP EDTHELP .HLP 5RSTS/E LB: .HLP EDTHEL .HLP t2 KEYPADFormat: SET [NO]KEYPAD cDThe SET KEYPAD (abbreviated SE K) option controls whether or not theHediting keypad is to be used when you are in CHANGE mode. KEYPAD is setBby default for VT100 and VT52 terminals, which means the alternateAkeypad is used to enter change mode commands. For terminals with-Afunction keys, the function keys can also be used in KEYPAD mode.E2 LINESrFThe SET LINES (abbreviated SE L) command controls the number of screenElines used in either of the screen versions of change mode. Use this]Coption to reduce the time it takes to refresh the screen image when editing on slow terminals. oFormat: SET LINES n  CGwhere n is the number of lines to use. n must be between 1 and 22. ByhHdefault, n is set to 22 lines. If the cursor limits are larger than n-1)they are reduced to n-1. See SET CURSOR. 2 MODEHThe SET MODE (abbreviated SE M) command determines which mode of editingAshould be entered after all initial processing is complete. This 3command is useful only in the startup command file.  u"Format: SET MODE { LINE | CHANGE } e?By default, EDT enters line mode when the startup processing is Hcomplete. Use SET MODE CHANGE in your startup command file to cause EDT9to enter change mode when startup processing is complete.s 2 NUMBERS Format: SET [NO]NUMBERSd HThe SET NUMBERS (abbreviated SE NU) command controls the display of lineHnumbers on the terminal. Numbers are set on by default. If you want to9suppress numbers, use SET NONUMBERS (abbreviated SE NON).r 2 PARAGRAPHiFormat: SET PARAGRAPH [NO]WPSN HThe SET PARAGRAPH (abbreviated SE PARA) command specifies a paragraph asEthe text between two delimiters and including any adjacent delimitersu2(WPS), or the text between two delimiters (NOWPS).2 PROMPT'Format: SET PROMPT prompt-type 'string'd EWhere prompt-type is either LINE, KEYPAD, NOKEYPAD, HCCHANGE, INSERT,iINSERTN, or QUERY. iGThe SET PROMPT command allows redefinition of the prompt string that issEdisplayed in line mode, in keypad mode, in nokeypad mode, in hardcopyREchange mode, in line mode when inserting, in line mode when insertingf.with NONUMBERS, and with the /QUERY qualifier. EEDT will become confused if the new string for the keypad or nokeypaddDprompt causes a net motion of the cursor. If a pair is notEincluded in the new string for any prompt which has it in the defaultEEprompt, these characters will be inserted at the beginning of the newnstring.r2 QUIETnDThe SET QUIET (abbreviated SE Q) command controls whether or not the5bell will sound when an error is made in change mode.  lFormat: SET [NO]QUIETf iAThe quiet option is off (meaning the bell will sound) by default.o2 REPEATGThe SET REPEAT (abbreviated SE REP) command enables you to use the GOLD Dkey followed by digits to represent a count. If you do not want theBability to use counts, use SET NOREPEAT (abbreviated SE NOREP). ACwarning bell sounds if you attempt to use counts with NOREPEAT set.  Format: SET [NO]REPEAT mBy default, REPEAT is enabled.2 SCREENFThe SET SCREEN (abbreviated SE SC) command specifies the width of your terminal.  eFormat: SET SCREEN w tFwhere w is the width of the screen line. By default, the screen widthCis set to the terminal's width, as reported to EDT by the operatingtHsystem. On VT100-type terminals you can set the width to 80 or 132, andGEDT will adjust the terminal appropriately. On other CRT terminals youtCshould only use the terminal's fixed width: 80 for VT52s and 84 foryVK100s. 2 SEARCHCThe SET SEARCH (abbreviated SE SE) command controls several optionsirelated to string searching. ,Format: SET SEARCH { GENERAL | EXACT | WPS |, CASE INSENSITIVE | CI |3 DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE | DI } " { [UN]BOUNDED }" { BEGIN | END } 3 GENERAL EThe GENERAL option will cause the case of letters and the presence orRFabsence of diacritical marks to be ignored in search strings. GENERALis the default.K3 EXACT HThe EXACT option will require all characters to match exactly, includingDthe case of letters and the presence of diacritical marks, in searchstrings.3 WPS GThe WPS option will cause a case-independent string match for lowercaseLFletters in the search string, and a case-dependent match for uppercaseletters in the search string. 3 CIDThe CI option will cause the case of letters to be ignored in search=strings, but not the presence of diacritical marks. CI is anN"abbreviation for CASE INSENSITIVE.3 DIFThe DI option will cause diacritical marks on letters to be ignored inHstring searches, but not the case of the letters. DI is an abbreviationfor DIACRITICAL INSENSITIVE. 3 BOUNDEDiGThe BOUNDED (abbreviated BO) option will cause the search to be bounded Fby a page delimiter. By default, the search is unbounded, which meansHthat the entire buffer will be searched. This option has effect only in change mode. tHThe UNBOUNDED (abbreviated U) option causes the search not to be bounded?by a page delimiter, which means that the entire buffer will berFsearched. This is the default. This option has effect only in changemode. 3 BEGINiDThe BEGIN (abbreviated B) option causes the cursor to be left at theEbeginning of the search string when it is found. This is the default. +This option has effect only in change mode.a3 ENDtFThe END (abbreviated E) option causes the cursor to be left at the endHof the search string when it is found. By default, the cursor is left at:the beginning. This option has effect only in change mode. 2 SUMMARY GThe SET [NO]SUMMARY command controls whether or not summary information Gabout a file written with the WRITE or EXIT commands will be typed out.sFThe default is SUMMARY, which means that summary information is typed. Format: SET [NO]SUMMARYt 2 TABeBThe SET TAB (abbreviated SE TA) command enables the structured tab&feature and sets the logical tab size. eFormat: SET [NO]TAB ni o7where n is the number of columns in a logical tab stop.i pFWith the structured tab feature, EDT keeps a counter of the tab level,Fwhich is set to 1 when the SET TAB command is issued. When you use theEtab key in change mode at the beginning of a line, EDT inserts enoughMGtabs and spaces to move the cursor to the column defined by the level n]Ktimes the tab size. Change mode nokeypad commands can alter the tab level.u2The structured tab feature is disabled by default. CThe tab size set by the tab command is also used by the TABS ADJUSTicommand. 2 TERMINAL,Format: SET TERMINAL { HCPY | VT100 | VT52 }* { SCROLL | NOSCROLL }& { EDIT | NOEDIT }. { EIGHTBIT | NOEIGHTBIT } GThe SET TERMINAL (abbreviated SE TE) command identifies to EDT the type Gof terminal you are using. Normally, EDT will set the terminal type by Fasking the operating system what type it is. If it does not appear toEhave set the type correctly, you can use the SHOW TERMINAL command to Dsee what EDT thinks your terminal is and the SET TERMINAL command toGcorrect it if necessary. If your terminal is not a VT100 or a VT52, it !should be set to HCPY (hardcopy). 3 HCPYEHCPY stands for hardcopy. EDT considers a terminal hardcopy if it iscFnot a VT100 or a VT52. On such terminals change mode does not use theFscreen as a window onto your buffer, but instead shows you the currentHline with the cursor position indicated. You type NOKEYPAD commands andBEDT will keep you informed by printing the current line after eachcommand.3 VT100RCThe VT100 is a family of terminals, all based on the original VT100 Cterminal. This class of terminals includes the VT101, VT102, VT125,YVT131 and VT132.3 VT52FThe VT52 terminal is the predecessor of the VT100 family. It does not5have reverse video, and has fewer keys in its keypad.i3 SCROLLFThis option indicates that your terminal has scrolling regions and EDT<may use them. This is the default for most VT100 terminals. 3 NOSCROLLGThis option indicates that either your terminal does not have scrolling Aregions or EDT should not use them. This is the default for VT52l terminals.3 EDITHThis option indicates that your terminal has the screen editing featuresHof the VT102. These are IL (insert line), DL (delete line), ICM (insert,character mode) and DCH (delete characters).3 NOEDITAThis option indicates that your terminal does not have the screendediting features of the VT102. 3 EIGHTBITGThis option indicates that your terminal contains the DEC MultinationalrFCharacter Set, which extends ASCII to include letters with diacritical*marks and other characters used in Europe. 3 NOEIGHTBITAThis option indicates that your terminal does not contain the DECHMultinational character set. On such a terminal characters which cannot-be displayed directly are displayed using <>. 2 TEXT$Format: SET TEXT text-type 'string' d"Text-type is one of the following: r PAGE END  HAThe SET TEXT command allows you to define the displayed string totGindicate a formfeed character (SET TEXT PAGE), and the displayed stringaEto indicate the end of the buffer (SET TEXT END). The string can nots%contain control or escape characters.e 2 TRUNCATEEThe SET TRUNCATE (abbreviated SE TR) command controls the handling of long lines in change mode. cFormat: SET [NO]TRUNCATE @By default, truncate mode is set, which means long lines will beGtruncated on the display (the actual text is not altered). If you turnwHoff truncate mode by using SET NOTRUNCATE, long lines will be wrapped toAas many screen lines as are necessary to display the entire line.e2 VERIFYAThe SET VERIFY (abbreviated SE V) command controls the listing ofcBcommands that are executed from the startup command file or from amacro. aFormat: SET [NO]VERIFY hFVerify is off by default, which means the lines are not typed. If you9turn it on, each command line is typed as it is executed.s2 WORDFormat: SET WORD [NO]DELIMITER yGThe SET WORD (abbreviated SE W) command enables you to specify that therCword delimiters be considered words by themselves (NODELIMITER), or Hconsidered as part of the word they delimit (DELIMITER). The default is DELIMITER. m2 WRAPFormat: SET [NO]WRAP n rAThe SET WRAP (abbreviated SE W) command enables word wrapping andCspecifies the right margin. Word wrapping is a feature of EDT thatuBautomatically insert carriage returns when the text you are typingDexceeds the right margin. Word wrapping is in effect in change mode4only and only if you have used the SET WRAP command. EThe SET WRAP command also sets the right margin for the nokeypad modetFILL commmand. eCSET NOWRAP (abbreviated SE NOW) disables the word wrapping feature.E1 SHOWFormat: SHOW parameter rAThe SHOW (abbreviated SH) command displays the following selectedh0information on the current state of the editor: ( AUTOREPEAT PROMPT' BUFFER QUIETh( CASE REPEAT( COMMAND SCREEN( CURSOR SEARCH% ENTITY TABh* FILES TERMINAL& FNF TEXT* KEY TRUNCATE( KEYPAD VERIFY) LINES VERSIONn& MODE WORD& NUMBERS WRAP PARAGRAPH ANo further HELP is available for these SHOW parameters. However, =since you can issue the SET command to control most of these Cparameters, type HELP SET parameter for information about what the parameters do. 1 SUBSTITUTEBThe SUBSTITUTE (abbreviated S) command replaces occurrences of one)string of characters with another string.  MFormat: SUBSTITUTE/string-1/string-2/ [range] [/BRIEF[:n]] [/QUERY] [/NOTYPE]  HAny nonalphanumeric character except % can be used as string delimiters. HAll occurrences of string-1 within the specified range are replaced withBstring-2. If you do not specify range, a single occurrence in the@current line is substituted. The line in which the substitution*occurred is typed after each substitution. 2 /BRIEF[:n]EWhen you select the /BRIEF (abbreviated /BR) option, only the first n Hcharacters of the line are displayed. If you omit n, the default is 10. 2 /NOTYPEO>When you specify /NOTYPE (abbreviated /NOT) the lines in which%substitutions occurred are not typed.e2 NEXTHThe SUBSTITUTE NEXT (abbreviated N) command replaces the next occurrenceof string-1 with string-2. r/Format: [SUBSTITUTE] NEXT [/string-1/string-2/]i iGThe search for string-1 is made forward from the current location. WhenBFa substitution is made, the line where the substitution occurs becomesEthe current line. When the optional strings are omitted, the stringsa@used in the last SUBSTITUTE or SUBSTITUTE NEXT command are used.2 /QUERYFormat: /QUERY uGWhen you use the QUERY (abbreviated /Q) qualifier, EDT prompts you withN0a question mark (?) to verify each substitution. iResponses are: o! Y Yes, do the substitution.s' N No, do not do the substitution.s$ Q Quit, terminate the command.< A All, do the rest of the substitutions without query.1 TABuCThe TAB ADJUST (abbreviated TA A) command shifts each of a range of .lines a specified number of logical tab stops. T Format: TAB ADJUST [-] n [range] Fwhere n is the number of tab stops to shift. You must use the SET TABGcommand to set the logical tab size in order for this command to work.iDIf you omit range, the select range is assumed. If a minus sign (-)Hprecedes the count n, the text shifts to the left. Otherwise, it shifts to the right.e1 TYPEFThe TYPE (abbreviated T) command displays the specified range of lineson the terminal. )Format: TYPE [range] [/BRIEF[:n]] [/STAY]  i?The first line in the specified range becomes the current line.  tEIf the range specification starts with a nonalphabetic character, thes'keyword TYPE may be omitted completely. 2 /BRIEFFormat: /BRIEF[:n] aEWhen you select the /BRIEF (abbreviated /BR) option, only the first nuBcharacters of the line are displayed. If you omit n, the defaultis 10.2 /STAY Format: /STAYe )GWhen you select the /STAY (abbreviated /ST) option, the cursor positionmEis not changed by the TYPE command. This enables you to look at textfBelsewhere in the buffer (or in another buffer) without losing your position.h1 WRITEhHThe WRITE (abbreviated WR) command creates a file from a specified range of lines.B F7Format: WRITE file-spec [range] [/SEQUENCE[:init:incr]]t ,FWhen you specify a range, the text contained in that range becomes theGfile. When you do not specify a range, the contents of the current text Hbuffer becomes the new file. The cursor position is not affected by theWRITE command. 2 /SEQUENCE Format: /SEQUENCE[:init:incr]  tFWhen you use the /SEQUENCE option, the output file is in VFC (variableGwith fixed control) format, and line numbers are written in the controlnDfield. The values of both 'init' and 'incr' must be less than 65536. ]IIf you set init and incr, the file is renumbered starting with the numbertDyou choose for init, and the lines are incremented by the number youJchoose for incr. Otherwise, the line numbers assigned by EDT are written.EThese line numbers are truncated to integers and taken modulo 100000,with a maximum value of 65535.n, the output file is in VFC (variableGwith fixed control) format, and line numbers are written in the controlnDfield. The values of both 'init' and 'incr' must be less than 65536. ]IIf you set init and incr, the file is renumbered starting with the numbertDyou choose for init, and the lines are incremented by the number youJchoose for incr. Otherwise, the line  LOGIN/userid/passwordF To gain access to your system, you must have a valid user account. AA user account consists of a User Identification Code (UIC) and a U7 password. Your system manager assigns user accounts. aE To log into your system, type either LOGIN or HELLO, then press the oE RETURN key. The system responds with the userid prompt: Account ortE name. Type either your last name or your UIC, then press the RETURN F key again. The most common format for your UIC is [g,m], where g is E your group number and m is your member number. You may substitute a C slash (/) for the comma (,) and omit the brackets ([]) in the UIC t format. IC After you respond to the userid prompt, the system prompts you forC your password. Type your password, then press the RETURN key. Theo; password does not appear on your screen when you type it. AC If the userid and the password are valid, you are then logged intotC the system. A login message file prints on your terminal. If you,C do not log in correctly, messages stating this error appear on the B terminal. In this case, try to log in again. If you continue toA get error messages, you may want to verify your UIC and passwordo with your system manager.  ur password. Type your password, then press the RETURN key. Theo; password does not appear on your screen when you type it. AC If the userid and the password are valid, you are then logged intotC the system. A login message file prints on your terminal. If you,C do not A OPTION is a command procedure that you use to install and removeM> Micro/RSX optional software packages. Each of these softwareB packages includes an installation guide with instructions on how  to use OPTION.p a@ You can also use OPTION to install and remove your own softwareA applications for Micro/RSX. However, you must first tailor yourn@ software with parameter files prior to using the OPTION command@ procedure. See the Micro/RSX Guide to Advanced Programming for@ documentation on how to package software for OPTION and how to ( write your own installation procedure. l software packages. Each of these softwareB packages includes an installation guide with instructions on how  to use OPTION.p a@ You can also use OPTION to install and remove your own softwareA applications for Micro/RSX. However, you must first tailor yourn@ software with parameter files prior to using the OPTION command@ procedure. See the Micro/RSX Guide to Advanced Programming for@ documentation on how 6 The SET command establishes or changes the following:7 [DAY]TIME DEFAULT DEVICE ERROR_LOG FILE D GROUPFLAGS LIBRARY [NO]PARTITION PASSWORD PRIORITY? PROTECTION QUEUE SYSTEM TERMINAL UICB For information on the above commands, type HELP SET commandname. 2 LIBRARYo SET LIBRARY/DIRECTORY:[g,m]L The SET LIBRARY/DIRECTORY command establishes the Micro/RSX directory whereM system utilities and other nonprivileged system tasks are kept. The commandmF does not create a directory. This is a privileged command. See HELP ? SET SYSTEM DIRECTORY for privileged system tasks on Micro/RSX.A 2 ERROR_LOGS @DCLSETELR2 SYSTEM SET SYSTEM/qualifier F /[NO]CRASH_DEVICE:ddnn: (Advanced Programmer's Kit only) /DIRECTORY:[ufd]n /EXTENSION_LIMIT:nA /[NO]LOGINS /PACKETS:nYG This is a privileged command. See HELP SET SYSTEM qualifier for more t information.e3 NOCRASH_DEVICE #CRASH_DEVICEm3 CRASH_DEVICE" SET SYSTEM/[NO]CRASH_DEVICE:ddnn:B /CRASH_DEVICE allows you to designate the device on which you canB take a dump of memory after a system crash. This command loads aC specific crash driver into a main memory partition and updates thea crash data base.  E /NOCRASH_DEVICE unloads the crash driver, and updates the crash data]. base. Bugcheck then services system crashes.A This command is available only on the Advanced Programmer's Kit.i e 3 DIRECTORYE SET SYSTEM/DIRECTORY:[ufd]_K The /DIRECTORY qualifier establishes the directory where privileged systemgK tasks are kept. Nonprivileged tasks are placed in the library directory. .@ This command does not create a directory. See HELP SET LIBRARY.3 EXTENSION_LIMIT  SET SYSTEM/EXTENSION_LIMIT:n/E The /EXTENSION_LIMIT qualifier sets the maximum size to which a tasks@ can extend itself by means of the EXTEND TASK system directive.@ n is specified in bytes or in 1024-byte units if suffixed by K. 3 PACKETSE SET SYSTEM/PACKETS:nIF The /PACKETS qualifier alters the number of preallocated I/O packets.E n equals 0 through 15. Normally, some number of 18-word I/O packets.F are set aside in pool and retained in a separate queue for use by the> QIO directive. This number of packets is used to optimize the servicing of QIO requests. 3 NOLOGINS#LOGINSt3 LOGINS SET SYSTEM/[NO]LOGINS: The /NOLOGINS qualifier disables logging into the system.C If you issue this command and then log out, you have to reboot the/E system to log back in, unless there is another privileged user still # logged in. /LOGINS is the default. 2 DAYTIMEs#TIMEb 2 DEFAULTr( SET DEFAULT[/qualifier][:ddnn:] [[ufd]]! /[NO]NAMED_DIRECTORYsK The SET DEFAULT command sets either your default directory or the device, i or both.  uD SET DEFAULT with no parameters returns a nonprivileged user to the F login device and directory. For privileged users, the unadorned SET I DEFAULT returns to the login device, but the directory remains the same. D Type SET DEFAULT NAMED_DIRECTORY for information on this qualifier.3 NONAMED_DIRECTORYA#NAMED_DIRECTORY3 NAMED_DIRECTORYU0 SET DEFAULT/[NO]NAMED_DIRECTORY[:ddnn:] [[ufd]]C The default on Micro/RSX is to have named directories. These are iA directories with names in the form [ELECTRIC] or [303005]. The mF /NONAMED_DIRECTORIES qualifier specifies that you wish to ignore any I directories with names. This means that, when you do refer to numbered eF directories, you must specify their names in the form [303,5] and not [303005]. G Operating with /NONAMED_DIRECTORY has some subtle side effects, and itEF is not recommended for use. Specifying /NONAMED_DIRECTORY is commonly@ called specifying old-style directories because the behavior isF identical to that on previous RSX systems. See the main text for the effects of using this command. 2 DEVICE SET DEVICE:ddnn:/qualifier[s] /[NO]CHECKPOINT_FILE[:n]a /[NO]LOWERCASEr /[NO]PUBLIC /WIDTH:n @ The SET DEVICE command establishes the attributes of a device. = Except for setting the width of your own terminal, this is af privileged command. 1 Type HELP SET DEVICE qualifier for further help. 3 CHECKPOINT_FILEp#NOCHECKPOINT_FILE 3 LOWERCASEc #NOLOWERCASE 3 NOPUBLIC#PUBLIC 3 NOCHECKPOINT_FILEs' SET DEVICE:ddnn:/[NO]CHECKPOINT_FILE:nsD The /CHECKPOINT_FILE qualifier sets aside n blocks on the specifiedE volume in [0,0]CORIMG.SYS to be the checkpoint file. n is a decimal:E number. The volume must be in Files-11 format. Only one checkpointF file is permitted on each volume, but all volumes may have checkpointH files. Checkpoint files can be allocated on volumes mounted on private devices.LH /NOCHECKPOINT_FILE eliminates a current checkpoint file on the device. ? The command does not take effect until the checkpoint file is cleared.P 3 NOLOWERCASEf SET DEVICE:ddnn:/[NO]LOWERCASEi@ /LOWERCASE sets a terminal or a printer to lowercase. If these@ devices are not set to lowercase, all lowercase characters are G translated to uppercase before being typed or printed. The default isv /NOLOWERCASE. l3 SYSTEM#PUBLICe 3 NOSYSTEM#PUBLIC 3 PUBLIC SET DEVICE:ddnn:/[NO]PUBLICM The SET DEVICE:ddnn:/PUBLIC command sets a device to public access. A publicmH device can be mounted by anyone. SET DEVICE:ddnn:/NOPUBLIC removes the9 public status of a device. This is the default setting.SG The opposite of a public device is a private device. Use ALLOCATE to t create a private device. c3 WIDTH  SET DEVICE:ddnn:/WIDTH:neK The SET DEVICE:ddnn:/WIDTH command sets the size of a device's I/O buffer.PH This is the number of characters in a line on the device. The value of n is decimal. dD Nonprivileged users can only set the width of their own terminal. 9 SET TERMINAL/WIDTH is the same command for this purpose.t 2 GROUPFLAGS SET GROUPFLAGS:n[/CREATE] f SET GROUPFLAGS:n/DELETE sC The SET GROUPFLAGS command creates and deletes group global event K flags. The default is to create them. You must enter the group number. CJ Privileged users can create or delete global event flags for any group. G Nonprivileged users can create or delete global event flags for their a own group.r 2 NOPARTITIONc #PARTITION 2 PARTITIONt' SET [NO]PARTITION:parname/qualifier[s] ! /BASE:ne! /DEVICEG% /DIAGNOSTICE! /SIZE:nr! /SYSTEMt$ /TOP:valueE The SET PARTITION command creates a partition in the system memory. oC SET NOPARTITION deletes the partition. The parname argument namesn@ the partition. This name can be up to six Radix-50 characters. E The /BASE and /SIZE qualifiers are required with SET PARTITION. TheiF /BASE qualifier specifies the starting address of the partition. The E base address, n, is specified in 32-word units. The /SIZE qualifier 8 specifies the size of the partition in 32-word blocks. F Type HELP SET PARTITION qualifier for help on the remaining, optional qualifiers. This is a privileged command.3 DEVICE! SET [NO]PARTITION:parname/DEVICEnF The /DEVICE qualifier identifies the partition as a common partition A for mapping into the device registers, that is, a device common. 3 DIAGNOSTIC& SET [NO]PARTITION:parname/DIAGNOSTIC @ The /DIAGNOSTIC qualifier creates a partition that is used for @ diagnostic functions on multiprocessor systems. The specified 9 partition is created without checking the top of memory. 3 SYSTEM! SET [NO]PARTITION:parname/SYSTEMT@ The /SYSTEM qualifier identifies a system-controlled partition.3 TOP SET PARTITION:parname/TOP:valueF The /TOP qualifier moves the top boundary of the specified partition,B based on the format of the value argument. The value argument isD a number of 64-byte blocks, expressed in one of the five following formats: @ +n moves the top boundary of the partition up by the specified ( amount, making the partition larger.C -n moves the top boundary of the partition down by the specified T& amount, making the partition smaller.= n makes the partition the specified size by moving the top e boundary.D [+]* moves the top boundary of the partition up as far as possible.< -* moves the top boundary of the partition down as far as possible. 2 PRIORITY SET PRIORITY:n taskname oF The SET PRIORITY command changes the priority of an active task. The( value of n can be from 0 through 250. 2 PROTECTION0 SET PROTECTION:code[/qualifier[s]] filespec[s] $ /DATE:dd-mmm-yy% /SINCE:dd-mmm-yyh' /THROUGH:dd-mmm-yyt7 /SINCE:dd-mmm-yy/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy  /TODAYs& /EXCLUDE:filespec> The SET PROTECTION command controls user access to a file by F establishing its protection code. The code argument consists of fourD groups (SYSTEM:,OWNER:,GROUP:,WORLD:), each of which is followed byE the appropriate code letters specifying the protection, as follows:  R - allow read access to file W - allow write access to file  E - allow file to be extended D - allow file to be deletedC! The system default protection is , (SYSTEM:RWED,OWNER:RWED,GROUP:RWED,WORLD:R): For more information, type HELP SET PROTECTION qualifier.3 DATE/ SET PROTECTION:code/DATE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s] C The /DATE qualifier establishes the protection of files created on  the given date. l3 SINCEt0 SET PROTECTION:code/SINCE:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]D The /SINCE qualifier establishes the protection of files created on@ or after the given date. You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 3 THROUGHi2 SET PROTECTION:code/THROUGH:dd-mmm-yy filespec[s]C The /THROUGH qualifier establishes the protection of files createdD on or before the given date. You can combine /THROUGH and /SINCE to create a range of dates. 3 TODAYs& SET PROTECTION:code/TODAY filespec[s]H The /TODAY qualifier establishes the protection of files created today. 3 EXCLUDEe4 SET PROTECTION:code/EXCLUDE:filespec[s] filespec[s]F When you use the /EXCLUDE qualifier, the command establishes the fileF protection code of all specified files except those designated in the qualifier's argument.2 QUEUE @DCLSETQ 2 TERMINAL" SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/qualifier[s]E The SET TERMINAL command sets various attributes of your terminal. A4 privileged user can set attributes of any terminal.7 You can get help for these categories of SET TERMINAL:r$ HELP SET TERMINAL COMMON_USE ' HELP SET TERMINAL TERMINAL_SETUP]# HELP SET TERMINAL TASK_SETUPi A Note that the SET TERMINAL/INQUIRE command will set most of your = terminal attributes for you. See HELP SET TERMINAL INQUIRE. 3 INQUIRED SET TERMINAL/INQUIRESD This command tests the terminal type and then sets all appropriate F attributes for that terminal type. In most cases, you will not need F to change any attributes of your terminal after issuing this command.C If you include this command in your LOGIN.CMD file, your terminal L) attributes are set each time you log in.T? See HELP SET TERMINAL COMMON_USE for the most common terminal t< attributes that you may want to change from their defaults. 3 COMMON_USE" SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/qualifier[s]@ The following qualifiers set terminal characteristics that the B average Micro/RSX terminal user may need. For more information on? a particular characteristic, type HELP SET TERMINAL qualifier.g /[NO]BROADCAST  /CLI:cliname /[NO]CONTROL=C /DCL /[NO]HOLD_SCREENr /INQUIRE  /[NO]LOWERCASEN /[NO]PRIVILEGED /[NO]SERIAL /SPEED:(t,r)a /[NO]UPPERCASEu /WIDTH:no 3 NOBROADCASTe #BROADCAST 3 BROADCASTE# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]BROADCAST]D The SET TERMINAL/NOBROADCAST command prevents messages that another? user sends using the BROADCAST command from being typed on the> specified terminal. You might choose this option if you wereE printing out a hard copy of a file for reproduction. The default is /BROADCAST. ]3 DCLR SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/DCL  B This command sets a terminal to the DCL command line interpreter.D Since it is a DCL command, it is mainly useful for privileged users, who wish to set some other terminal to DCL.3 CLIS! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/CLI:clinamevA This command sets a terminal to an alternate command line inter-rD preter (CLI). The cliname is from one to six Radix-50 characters. C See your system manager for information on any alternative CLIs atn your installation. 3 NOCONTROL=C #CONTROL=C 3 CONTROL=C:# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]CONTROL=Ci; This command establishes whether a CTRL/C causes an abort m8 (/CONTROL=C) or an explicit DCL> prompt (/NOCONTROL=C).3 WIDTHm SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/WIDTH:nI The SET TERMINAL/WIDTH command sets the width of your terminal, that is,eF the length of a line. n can be from 0 through 132. Note that a lineK length of zero means no commands can be entered on the terminal. See alsoe HELP SET TERMINAL PAGE.3 ECHO#NOECHOO 3 EIGHT_BITC #NOEIGHT_BIT3 ESCAPE #NOESCAPEA 3 FORM_FEED] #NOFORM_FEED 3 FULL_DUPLEXs#NOFULL_DUPLEX3 NOFULL_DUPLEX % SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]FULL_DUPLEXDD The /FULL_DUPLEX qualifier instructs the terminal driver to accept @ input from the specified terminal while simultaneously sending , output to it. This is the default setting.E The /NOFULL_DUPLEX qualifier disables this capability. The terminala- can send or receive, but not simultaneously. 3 HARDCOPY#SCOPE3 CRFILL SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/CRFILL:n< The SET TERMINAL/CRFILL command sets the attributes used to? accommodate the carriage-return/line-feed process on hard-copyN? terminals. While the terminal is performing the line feed, an@ number of null characters may be needed to fill in for the time> the terminal is not capable of accepting new characters. The, value n can be any number from 0 through 7. 3 INTERACTIVE #PASSALL3 LOCALn#REMOTEr 3 LOWERCASEo #UPPERCASE3 NOECHO SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]ECHOD The SET TERMINAL/ECHO command sets your terminal show what you typeE on the terminal keyboard. By using /NOECHO, you no longer see what oE you type, although the system still receives your commands. /ECHO ise the default. 3 NOEIGHT_BITe# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]EIGHT_BITiC The SET TERMINAL/EIGHT_BIT command sets your terminal to eight-bitlF character mode. /EIGHT_BIT allows the terminal to pass all eight bitsC of the ASCII characters. This attribute is used when a terminal isn9 communicating with a device that sends eight-bit ASCII. rB /NOEIGHT_BIT is the default. DEC software employs seven-bit ASCII (without parity checking).y 3 NOESCAPE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]ESCAPE@ The SET TERMINAL/ESCAPE command sets your terminal to recognize> terminal escape sequences. When you press the ESC key, it is5 interpreted as the beginning of an escape sequence. I lE /NOESCAPE is the default. In this case, when you press the ESC key,sD it is interpreted as a line terminator (a line feed but no carriage return).i 3 NOFORM_FEEDr# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]FORM_FEED E If the terminal hardware supports form feeds, the terminal should beSA set /FORMFEED. If the form feeds are provided by software line c/ feeds, the terminal should be set /NOFORMFEED. 3 NOHARDCOPY#SCOPE3 NOHOLD_SCREENS% SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]HOLD_SCREENnF The SET TERMINAL/HOLD_SCREEN command allows text to be presented on aD VT50, VT52, or VT55 terminal one page or one line at a time. AfterD issuing this command, pressing the SCROLL key alone causes one lineE to scroll off the top of the screen and one line to scroll on to theeC bottom of the screen. Pressing the SHIFT and SCROLL keys togetherp? causes one screen's worth of scrolling. /NOHOLD_SCREEN is the O default.! See also HELP SET TERMINAL PAGE.SE This command does not work on VT100s and some other video terminals. 3 NOINTERACTIVEx#PASSALL 3 NOLOCALa#REMOTEV 3 NOLOWERCASEr #UPPERCASE 3 NOPASSALLe#PASSALL 3 NOPRIVILEGEi #PRIVILEGE 3 NOREMOTE#REMOTEO 3 NOSCOPEe#SCOPE 3 NOSLAVEt#SLAVE3 NOTABt#TAB3 NOTYPE_AHEAD #TYPE_AHEADr 3 NOUPPERCASE #UPPERCASE3 NOWRAP#WRAPi 3 PAGE_LENGTHd# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/PAGE_LENGTH:ncO The SET TERMINAL/PAGE_LENGTH command sets the number of lines per page on yourT terminal.L The page length on a CRT terminal is the number of lines on the screen. TheF default differs by terminal model. See also HELP SET TERMINAL WIDTH. 3 PASSALLA SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/PASSALLi# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOINTERACTIVE  SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOPASSALLE! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/INTERACTIVETE /NOPASSALL is the default and means that any characters typed on theF terminal are interpreted by the terminal driver before they are sent ) to the task. /INTERACTIVE is a synonym.yI /PASSALL means that characters typed on the terminal are passed directly G to the requesting task without interpretation by the terminal driver. T /NOINTERACTIVE is a synonym.S 3 PRIVILEGED$ SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]PRIVILEGEDF The SET TERMINAL/PRIVILEGED command sets your terminal to be a privi-B leged terminal. A privileged terminal can issue all DCL commands.; The SET TERMINAL/NOPRIVILEGED commands sets your terminal r nonprivileged.a( This command is, of course, privileged.3 REMOTE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/LOCALt SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOREMOTE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOLOCALg SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/REMOTEE The above commands tell the system whether the specified terminal isSE a local or a remote terminal. Remote terminals are connected to thea? system through telephone lines. Local terminals are connectede directly to the system. L3 SCOPE. SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/HARDCOPY SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOSCOPE SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOHARDCOPY SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/SCOPEEG The above commands tell the system whether the specified terminal is aT hardcopy or a video terminal.3 SLAVEt SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]SLAVE @ The SET TERMINAL/SLAVE command prevents a user at the specifiedD terminal from issuing commands to the system, except for input thatF may be requested by a task running at the slaved terminal. A terminalF is often slaved while running a task to dedicate the terminal to thatE task. The terminal can be left unattended without fear of its beingC$ used to gain access to the system. E SET TERMINAL/ttnn:/NOSLAVE must be issued from a nonslaved terminal..3 SPEEDt! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/SPEED:(t,r) G The SET TERMINAL/SPEED command sets the transmit and receive speeds ofi your terminal.cG The first of the two numbers entered is the terminal's transmit speed.uE The second is its receive speed. Normally, both of these will be thegD same speed, but Micro/RSX supports split speed terminals (terminals- with different transmit and receive speeds).eA The /SPEED setting must match the hardware speed setting on the b terminal.3 TABs SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]TABT RA If the terminal hardware supports horizontal tabs, the terminal tA should be set /TAB. If the software provides tabs, the terminalo should be set /NOTAB. 3 TASK_SETUPD The following qualifiers set terminal attributes that may be neededF for system or user tasks. Most system tasks that require these attri-H butes will set the attributes when they attach the terminal. User tasksB can also do this. These parameters are included for use in cases G where the task does not set the terminal. For more information, type r HELP SET TERMINAL qualifier.  /[NO]ECHO /[NO]PASSALL /[NO]EIGHT_BIT /[NO]REMOTE /[NO]ESCAPE /[NO]SERIALs /[NO]FULL_DUPLEX /[NO]SLAVE" /[NO]INTERACTIVE /[NO]TYPEAHEAD:n) /[NO]LOCAL /[NO]WRAPf s3 TERMINAL_SETUPF The following qualifiers relate to hardware characteristics of a ter-? minal. For more information, type HELP SET TERMINAL qualifier.i> /[NO]ADVANCED_VIDEO /[NO]EDIT_MODE /[NO]SOFT_CHARACTERS2 /[NO]ANSI_CRT /[NO]FORM_FEED /[NO]TAB4 /[NO]AUTOBAUD /[NO]HARDCOPY /MODEL:arg8 /[NO]BLOCK_MODE /LFFILL /PAGE_LENGTH:n; /CRFILL:n /[NO]REGIS /[NO]PARITY[:arg] 2 /[NO]DEC_CRT /[NO]SCOPE /WIDTH:nC /ASR33 /ASR35 /KSR33 /KSR35 /LA12 /LA30P /LA30SdD /LA34 /LA36 /LA38 /LA50 /LA100 /LA120 /LA180SC /VT05 /VT50 /VT52 /VT55 /VT61 /VT100 /VT101 @ /VT102 /VT105 /VT125 /VT131 /VT132 /VT200_SERIES3 NOADVANCED_VIDEO#ADVANCED_VIDEOO3 ADVANCED_VIDEO( SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]ADVANCED_VIDEOB This command states whether a VT100-series terminal includes the F advanced video option, which gives it the capability to blink, bold, D and flash parts of the screen, as well as to set the screen at 132 C columns wide. If the word SET-UP blinks when your terminal is in /B setup mode, you have the advanced video option. See your system  manager for more information. 3 NOANSI_CRT #ANSI_CRT_ 3 NOANSI_CRT" SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]ANSI_CRTD This command states whether the terminal output is a subset of the F ANSI standard. Terminals with the /ANSI_CRT attribute do not output " DIGITAL private escape sequences. 3 NOAUTOBAUD #AUTOBAUDa 3 AUTOBAUD" SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]AUTOBAUDD This command enables autobaud detection on a remote dial-up line. F This means that when a remote terminal dials up, the terminal driver B samples the first character sent along the line to determine the C incoming baud rate and sets the interface speed accordingly. The s default is /NOAUTOBAUD.3 NOBLOCK_MODE #BLOCK_MODE 3 BLOCK_MODE$ SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]BLOCK_MODEF This command states whether the terminal is capable of local editing  and block-mode transmission.n 3 NODEC_CRTA#DEC_CRT 3 DEC_CRTn! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]DEC_CRTeD This command states whether the terminal is upward-compatible with  the VT100-series of terminals.r 3 NOPARITY#PARITYn3 PARITY$ SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]PARITY:arg$ ODD% EVENF Parity generation and checking is used to verify the transmission of F data between the terminal and the computer. Verification is done by H sending an extra bit with each character, which serves as a check that 1 the character transmitted was received properly.mC This command enables, disables, and determines the type of parity sE checking for a given terminal line. SET TERM/PARITY:EVEN checks to nC see if the total number of 1-bits for each character is even. The  ODD argument is analogous. E The terminal hardware must be set to the same mode of parity genera-dE tion and checking for correct data transmission to occur. On VT100-sI and VT200-series terminals, this is done in the terminal's SET-UP mode. eH SET TERM/PARITY is not the same as /EIGHT_BIT. If parity is selected, H then an extra bit is physically transmitted with each character. Eight-D bit only affects whether the 8th data bit is cleared or left alone. 3 TYPEAHEADc' SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]TYPEAHEAD[:n] E The SET TERMINAL/TYPEAHEAD command enables your terminal's typeaheadp= buffer. The typeahead buffer is 36 characters long and holdsn@ characters when they are typed faster than they are accepted as input. H If your typeahead buffer is full, you cannot enter any characters, and F any key you strike returns a buzz, bell, or beep. In this instance, . type a CTRL/X to clear your typeahead buffer.G On Micro/RSX systems, you can specify a size from 0 through 255 bytes [G for your typeahead buffer. This setting is required for use with the J Micro/RSX SET TERMINAL/SERIAL command. See also HELP SET TERMINAL SERIAL. 3 NOEDIT_MODE #EDIT_MODE 3 EDIT_MODE # SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]EDIT_MODEsC This command states whether the terminal can perform ANSI-defined h< advanced editing functions. The VT102 is such a terminal. 3 NOREGISi#REGIS3 REGISp SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]REGISdF This command states whether the terminal supports the Regis graphics 5 set. The VT125 and VT240 support this graphics set.s 3 NOSERIAL#SERIALh3 SERIAL SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]SERIALC The SET TERMINAL/[NO]SERIAL command on Micro/RSX systems sets yourD= terminal for either serial or parallel command processing. E The default is /SERIAL, which means that there can be only one task @ running at your terminal at any time. For instance, with serialF processing, the LINK command can be typed immediately after the MACROC command, but it will not execute until the assembly is completed. 0F If you choose serial command processing, you may want to increase theL size of your terminal's typeahead buffer. See HELP SET TERMINAL TYPEAHEAD. F /NOSERIAL allows each command to be processed as it is entered. For E instance, you may want to edit a file while also running a compiler.a@ If you are set /NOSERIAL, watch for the return of the $ prompt G carefully. You get one $ prompt per task when execution is completed.CA When you are set /NOSERIAL, CTRL/C aborts affect all tasks that .G include your terminal number in their name. You may want to set your tH terminal /NOCONTROL=C, which allows you to abort tasks and commands by  name. 3 NOSOFT_CHARACTERSh#SOFT_CHARACTERS3 SOFT_CHARACTERSe) SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]SOFT_CHARACTERS C This command states whether the terminal accepts software-defined hD character sets. The VT200-series terminals accept these character  sets. 3 UPPERCASE  SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/LOWERCASE ! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOUPPERCASE ! SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/NOLOWERCASEn SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/UPPERCASEtB The above commands tell the system whether your terminal supportsD lowercase characters. On terminals that do not have /LOWERCASE set,F lowercase characters are converted to uppercase before they are typed7 or printed at the terminal. /UPPERCASE is the default.f3 LFFILL SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/LFFILLH The SET TERMINAL/LFFILL command sets the attributes used to accommodateD vertical spacing on terminals. While the terminal is performing a E vertical tab, line feed, or form feed, four null characters are sentcE to fill in for the time the terminal is not capable of accepting newa characters.3 ASR33t#VT61 3 KSR33E#VT61e3 ASR35r#VT61a3 KSR35r#VT61r3 LA12#VT61e3 LA30Sh#VT61t3 LA30P #VT61 3 LA34#VT61.3 LA36#VT61t3 LA38#VT61 3 LA50#VT61R3 LA100n#VT61I3 LA120e#VT61R3 LA180S#VT61a3 VT05#VT61r3 VT50#VT61a3 VT52#VT61r3 VT55#VT61n3 VT100s#VT61e3 VT101i#VT61p3 VT102 #VT61r3 VT105,#VT61e3 VT125r#VT61 3 VT131 #VT61e3 VT132n#VT61 3 VT200_SERIES#VT61e3 VT61# SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/terminalmodelcH The SET TERMINAL/terminalmodel command tells the system what model your9 terminal is. /terminalmodel can be any of the following:C /ASR33 /ASR35 /KSR33 /KSR35 /LA12 /LA30P /LA30SnD /LA34 /LA36 /LA38 /LA50 /LA100 /LA120 /LA180SC /VT05 /VT50 /VT52 /VT55 /VT61 /VT100 /VT101V@ /VT102 /VT105 /VT125 /VT131 /VT132 /VT200_SERIESE Certain system tasks, and possibly some user tasks, make use of thisAD terminal model information, and therefore it is a good idea to make' sure that this information is correct. H Note that you can also use this command in the form SET TERMINAL/MODEL.I You must use SET TERMINAL/MODEL for non-DIGITAL terminals. See HELP SET  TERMINAL MODEL. 3 UNKNOWN #MODEL3 MODEL ) SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/MODEL:terminalmodel/ SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/MODEL:nTF The SET TERMINAL/MODEL command sets a terminal as a particular model.F The argument to /MODEL can be either the name of a DIGITAL terminal, E such as VT100, or a number, n, that has been assigned by your systemmI manager for the type of terminal you are using. n can be 0 through 255. S3 WRAP SET TERMINAL[:ttnn:]/[NO]WRAPB The SET TERMINAL/WRAP command tells the system that text typed atA your terminal should appear on the next line once the end of then? current line is reached. If the terminal is set to /WRAP, theEF terminal driver issues a carriage-return/line-feed pair when you typeF up to whatever line width the terminal is set for. If /NOWRAP is set,. no carriage-return/line-feed pair is issued. 2 TIME SET [DAY]TIME [date][time]oE The SET TIME command sets the current date and time. The date can be]F entered in either of these forms: dd-mmm-yy, or mm/dd/yy, but it will) always be displayed in the first format.t% The time is formatted as hh:mm[:ss]. H Either time, or date, or both, can be specified in the command line. If@ they are both specified, they can be specified in either order. 2 PASSWORD SET PASSWORDt Old password: New password: Verification:B SET PASSWORD changes your password. Your password must be one toD six characters, consisting of the 26 uppercase letters, the numbers. 0 through 9, the period, and the dollar sign.? After issuing the SET PASSWORD command, you type your current C password in response to the "Old password:" prompt. Then you type o> your new password in response to both the "New password:" and= "Verification:" prompts. To preserve security, what you typeTD in response to these prompts is not shown on your terminal screen. D Note that you must press a carriage return after typing the command" and your response to each prompt.2 UIC, SET UIC [g,m]@ This command allows you to change your UIC (user identificationE code). A UIC is the source of your protection status. Although SETtD UIC is not a privileged command, it has no effect for nonprivilegedE users. This command works only in named-directory mode, which is thee< default for Micro/RSX. The brackets are required syntax. ' See HELP SET DEFAULT NAMED_DIRECTORY. t2 FILE#SET FILE[/qualifier[s]] filespec[s] ( /END_OF_FILE[:(BLOCK:n,BYTE:n)] /ENTER:synonym_filespec /NOWARNINGS /REMOVE /REWIND /TRUNCATEASET FILE establishes certain file attributes. You can change an CFend-of-file marker, have an entry in one directory point to a file in Ganother directory, remove an entry from a directory, or truncate files tto their actual length.k3For more information, type HELP SET FILE qualifier.E 3 END_OF_FILE0SET FILE/END_OF_FILE[:(BLOCK:n,BYTE:n)] filespecDYou can specify only one file with this qualifier. Use /END_OF_FILE?to specify where a file's end-of-file pointer is. This helps in ?situations, such as system crashes, when a file contains usefulcFinformation, but its end-of-file pointer is wrong, preventing you fromobtaining the information. EIf you do not specify values for BLOCK and BYTE, the system puts the aFend-of-file pointer past the last byte of the last block allocated to the file. E?For BLOCK, the argument n specifies the block number where the nEend-of-file pointer is to be placed. Usually, the pointer cannot be fCplaced beyond the highest number of blocks allocated to the file. t0The block number can be either octal or decimal.DFor BYTE, the argument n specifies the location of the first unused Gbyte of the specified block. The byte number can be octal or decimal. t=The maximum value for byte is 777 (octal), or 511. (decimal). 3 ENTERb+SET FILE/ENTER:synonym_filespec filespec[s],GUse this switch if you want to be able to refer to a file by more than @one name, or if you wish to have the same file in more than one Fdirectory. The synonym_filespec is the new directory entry. If many Dusers need the same file, this qualifier can save you a lot of disk space. EIf there is already a file of the name you specify, the new file willa-be one version number higher than that file. ;If you specify more than one file with this qualifier, the TFsynonym_filespec points to all those files. In effect, the files are concatenated.aEIf you omit any field of the the synonym_filespec, the corresponding oCfield of the parameter filespec is used in its place. The default nparameter filespec is *.*;*e 3 NOWARNINGSSET FILE/NOWARNINGS filespec[s]f-Suppresses error messages from the operation. 3 REMOVESET FILE/REMOVE filespec[s]a@The /REMOVE qualifier is the opposite of the /ENTER qualifier. ESET FILE/REMOVE removes a directory entry from a directory. You can oGuse this qualifier to delete synonyms created by the /ENTER qualifier. iGYou can also use it to eliminate directory entries which, for whatever eFreason, point to nonexistent files. If you remove the last entry for Ea file, it can only be found with the VFY utility, which is supplied e6as part of the Advanced Programmer's Kit. Be careful.3 REWINDSET FILE/REWIND filespec[s] EThis qualifier is for use with magtapes only. It causes the tape to o'be rewound before the operation begins.Y 3 TRUNCATESET FILE/TRUNCATE filespec[s]n>This qualifier enables you to get back unused disk space. WhenDMicro/RSX creates a file, it allocates file space in multiple units,Fusually five blocks at a time. The system, however, uses these blocksBonly one at a time. This means that there are often unused blocksAincluded in files. Issue the command DIRECTORY/FULL to check theeCnumber of blocks used and allocated for a file. Two numbers in thetFform 23./25. in the listing indicate that 23 blocks are used out of 25Eallocated. Since EXTEND access allows the system to change file sizeuEwhenever it wants to, the extra blocks may be of only limited use and can be truncated without loss. bEIn some cases, the presence of the extra allocated but unused blocks i!may speed up execution of a task.n unused blocksAincluded in files. Issue the command DIRECTORY/FULL to check theeCnumber of blocks used and allocated for a file. Two numbers in thetFform 23./25. in the listing indicate that 23 blocks are used out of 25Eallocated. Since EXTEND access allows the system to change file sizm۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶m۶